diff options
author | Norbert Preining <norbert@preining.info> | 2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900 |
---|---|---|
committer | Norbert Preining <norbert@preining.info> | 2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900 |
commit | e0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d (patch) | |
tree | 60335e10d2f4354b0674ec22d7b53f0f8abee672 /macros/text1/cms_help_files |
Initial commit
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/text1/cms_help_files')
277 files changed, 11688 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fc45137071 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \footnotestyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \footnotestyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the numbering style for the +footnotes. The format for the \footnotestyle command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \footnotestyle{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is one of four possible values: + + 1 which gives numbered footnotes 1, 2, 3, etc. + (1) which gives numbered footnotes included in parentheses (1), (2) + a which gives lettered footnotes a, b, c, etc. + (a) which gives lettered footnotes enclosed in parentheses (a), (b) + +The \footnotestyle default is \footnotestyle{(1)} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..872fadaa4f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \verticalspace (\vs) COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \verticalspace (\vs) command will leave the specified amount of space or +the specified number of blank lines in the text. This command will also force +the following text into a new paragraph. The format for the \verticalspace +(\vs) command is: + + \verticalspace{x} + +Where "x" is the number of blank lines or space you wish to leave. For +example, + + \verticalspace{4\bl} + +will leave four blank lines, and + + \verticalspace{2in} + +will leave two inches of blank space. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a67f3982ae --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \notereferencefont COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \notereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the +footnote reference numbers in the text of the notes are printed. The format +for the \notereferencefont command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \notereferencefont{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8b39bf09ae --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \notereferencestyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \notereferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the +footnote reference numbers within the notes are printed. There are six +possible note numbering styles: + \notereferencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." + \notereferencestyle{1.} for numbered footnotes "1., 2., 3., ..." + \notereferencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." + \notereferencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..." + \notereferencestyle{a.} for lettered footnotes "a., b., c., ..." + \notereferencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." + +The format for the \notereferencestyle command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \notereferencestyle{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default +is \notereferencestyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c74fb65186 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \notereferencegutter COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \notereferencegutter command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the amount of space between +the footnote reference number and the text of the footnotes. The format for +the \notereferencegutter command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \notereferencegutter{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is any number and valid TeX measurement (in, pc, pts, etc.). +\notereferencegutter{1em} is the default and will give one emspace between the +footnote reference numbers and the text of the notes. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e0c19a24b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \blockquotebegin (\bqb) COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \blockquotebegin (\bqb) command will begin a new paragraph and indent the +following text the amount of the current paragraph indentation on both the left +and right margins. If the current paragraph indentation value is zero, the +indentation for the block quote will be one-half inch. The format for the +\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command is: + + \blockquotebegin + tttttt + tttttt + tttttt + \blockquoteend + +Where the "tttttt" designates the text included as the block quote. The +\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command is always used in conjunction with the +\blockquoteend (\bqe) command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af55b6bbd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \everyfootnote COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \everyfootnote command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format +within the footnote. The format for the \fortmatfootnote command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \everyfootnote{options + }} + +Where "options" is one or more of the following. + + \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent + \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip + \singlespace \doublespace font changes + \justify + +For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the +markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..de87d7cf5d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \everyendnote COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \everyendnote command is always used in conjunction with the \endnoteformat +(\enf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format within the +endnote. The format for the \everyendnote command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \everyendnote{options + }} + +Where "options" is one or more of the following. + + \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent + \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip + \singlespace \doublespace font changes + \justify + +For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the +markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ecd02acc90 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \everyfootnote COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \everyfootnote command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format +within the footnote. The format for the \everyfootnote command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \everyfootnote{options + }} + +Where "options" is one or more of the following. + + \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent + \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip + \singlespace \doublespace font changes + \justify + +For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the +markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9ba197b3e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\subheadbformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadb +titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is: + + \subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{xxx} + } + +where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadb is +\numberingstyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9f2fe89806 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\subheadaformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheada +titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is: + + \subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{xxx} + } + +where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheada is +\numberingstyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..24d6dbb6ca --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \footnotereferencefont COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \footnotereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnotereferenceformat command, and establishes what font will be used to set +the footnote reference numbers. The format for the \footnotereferencefont +command is: + + \footnotereferenceformat{ + \footnotereferencefont{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is a valid font style (\sf, \bf, \it, etc.). The default footnote +reference font is the standardface font. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7b10e91285 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) command will leave vertical space at the +beginning of a page or for a figure, plate, table, or any other reason when you +need to have the entire space specified kept intact. If the specified space +will not fit on the current page, it will be printed at the top of the +following page and the remaining current page will remain blank, causing you to +receive an underfull vbox warning. The \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) format is: + + \verticalspacekeep{xx} + +Where "xx" is the amount of vertical space expressed in any valid TeX +measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.) or in number of lines to be left for the figure. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2e72dd23cf --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \blockquoteend (\bqe) COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \blockquoteend (\bqe) command ends a block quote and starts a new +paragraph. The format for the \blockquoteend (\bqe) command is: + + \blockquotebegin + tttttt + tttttt + tttttt + \blockquoteend + +Where the "tttttt" designates the text included as the block quote. The +\blockquoteend (\bqe) command is always used in conjunction with the +\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f20d126e79 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \footnotedivider COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \footnotedivider command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the length for the line that +divides the page text from the beginning of the footnote text. The format for +the \footnotedivider command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \footnotedivider{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example, + + \footnoteformat{ + \footnotedivider{1.5in} + } + +would make the horizontal rule before the footnote text to be one and one-half +inches long. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f20d126e79 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \footnotedivider COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \footnotedivider command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the length for the line that +divides the page text from the beginning of the footnote text. The format for +the \footnotedivider command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \footnotedivider{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example, + + \footnoteformat{ + \footnotedivider{1.5in} + } + +would make the horizontal rule before the footnote text to be one and one-half +inches long. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2f7d5f5372 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \skipbefore COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \skipbefore command is always used in conjunction with the \endnoteformat +(\enf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space before the endnotes +are printed. The format for the \skipbefore command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \skipbefore{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, +etc.). For example, + + \endnoteformat{ + \skipbefore{1.5in} + } + +would put one and one-half inches of vertical space before the beginning of the +endnote text. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..98cab4d1b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadbformat +command and will set options for the subheadb titles. The format for the +\titleformat command is: + + \subheadbformat{\titleformat{ + \vsk{24pt} + {\it \subheadbtitle} + \vs{12pt}} + } + +This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadb command will space down 24 +points, print the \subheadbtitle in italics and space down 12 points to resume +with the text. + +For more information on the \subheadbtitle command, see the help screen under +the markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..98eb00954f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \beforefootnoteskip COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \beforefootnoteskip command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space +between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the +\beforefootnoteskip command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \beforefootnoteskip{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example, + + \footnoteformat{ + \beforefootnoteskip{1.5in} + } + +would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and +the footnote dividing rule. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b8517f05b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + Menu for BLOCKQUOTEFORMAT -- TEXT1 + +A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character +of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when +a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that +doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP +COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and +options type HELP HELP. + + +skipafter (space after block quotes) +skipbefore (space before block quotes) +blockquoteparagraphformat (establishing paragraph options + within block quotes) diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7a2445ec78 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \everyblockquote COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \everyblockquote command is always used in conjunction with the +\blockquoteformat (\bqf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format +within the blockquote. The format for the \everyblockquote command is: + + \blockquoteformat{ + \everyblockquote{options + }} + +Where "options" is one or more of the following. + + \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \interlineskip + \justify \rightragged font changes + \singlespace \doublespace \leftindent + \rightindent + +For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the +markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e58c80f034 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadbformat +command and will determine whether subheadb titles are included in the Table of +Contents. The format for the \incontents command is: + + \subheadbformat{ + \incontents{yes} + } + +By default, the subheadb titles will not be included in the Table of Contents. +If you want the subheadb titles included in the Table of Contents, enter +\incontents{yes} within the \subheadbformat command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b5f4b3d717 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadaformat +command and will determine whether subheada titles are included in the Table of +Contents. The format for the \incontents command is: + + \subheadaformat{ + \incontents{yes} + } + +By default, the subheada titles will be included in the Table of Contents. If +you do not want the subheada titles included in the Table of Contents, enter +\incontents{no} within the \subheadaformat command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bc6ebaf65d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \skipbeforedivider COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \skipbeforedivider command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space +between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the +\skipbeforedivider command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \skipbeforedivider{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, +etc.). For example, + + \footnoteformat{ + \skipbeforedivider{1.5in} + } + +would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and +the footnote dividing rule. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bc6ebaf65d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \skipbeforedivider COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \skipbeforedivider command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space +between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the +\skipbeforedivider command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \skipbeforedivider{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, +etc.). For example, + + \footnoteformat{ + \skipbeforedivider{1.5in} + } + +would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and +the footnote dividing rule. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2649fb0153 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \textreferenceposition COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \textreferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the +\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine whether the endnote reference +number within the text is a superscript number or not. The format for the +\textreferenceposition command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \textreferenceposition{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \textreferenceposition{up} will give +superscript numbers for the endnote reference numbers within the text. +\textreferenceposition{down} will give print the endnote reference numbers +within the text on the baseline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e0ab64ea02 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ + Menu for FOOTNOTEREFERENCEFORMAT Commands -- TEXT1 + +A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character +of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when +a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that +doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP +COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and +options type HELP HELP. + + +1--footnotestyle (the numbering style of the footnotes) +2--footnotereferencefont (the font used to set footnote + reference numbers) +3--precede (positioning of the footnote reference number before word) +4--follow (positioning the footnote reference number after the word) +5--superscript (superscript footnote reference numbers) +6--notsuperscript (footnote reference numbers not superscript) + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..08e7cd3e11 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \referenceposition COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \referenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote +reference number is a superscript number or not. The format for the +\referenceposition command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \referenceposition{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \referenceposition{up} will give +superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers. +\referenceposition{down} will give regular-sized footnote reference numbers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ba168c90f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \skipafterdivider COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \skipafterdivider command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space +between the footnote divider and the beginning of the text of the first +footnote. The format for the \skipafterdivider command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \skipafterdivider{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, +etc.). For example, + + \footnoteformat{ + \skipafterdivider{5pt} + } + +would put five points of vertical space between the the footnote dividing rule +and the text of the first footnote. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c1430e9b33 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \skipbefore COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \skipbefore command is always used in conjunction with the +\blockquoteformat (\bqf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space +that is to be skipped before the blockquote begins. The format for the +\skipbefore command is: + + \blockquoteformat{ + \skipbefore{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is the amount of space desired, expressed in number of lines or any +legal TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The amount of space indicated in the +\skipbefore command will be added to the current paragraph skip before +beginning the first paragraph of the blockquote. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f80277833c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \textreferencefont COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \textreferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the +\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the font in which the endnote +reference numbers in the text are printed. The format for the +\textreferencefont command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \textreferencefont{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5f70c16e4e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \referenceplacement COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \referenceplacement command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote +reference number is placed before or after the footnote reference word. The +format for the \referenceplacement command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \referenceplacement{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is either "before" or "after". \referenceplacement{after} will +place the footnote reference number after the word. \referenceplacement{before} +will place the footnote reference number before the word referenced. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3a4794e3a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \skipafter COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \skipafter command is always used in conjunction with the \blockquoteformat +(\bqf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space that is to be skipped +after the last paragraph of the blockquote ends. The format for the \skipafter +command is: + + \blockquoteformat{ + \skipafter{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is the amount of space desired, expressed in number of lines or any +legal TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The amount of space indicated in the +\skipafter command will be added to the current paragraph skip after ending the +last paragraph of the blockquote and before beginning the next paragraph of the +regular text. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..96e3aab143 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \textreferencestyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \textreferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the style in which the +endnote reference numbers within the text are printed. There are six possible +text numbering styles: + \textreferencestyle{1} for numbered endnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." + \textreferencestyle{[1]} for numbered endnotes "[1], [2], ..." + \textreferencestyle{(1)} for numbered endnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." + \textreferencestyle{a} for lettered endnotes "a, b, c, ..." + \textreferencestyle{[a]} for lettered endnotes "[a], [b] ..." + \textreferencestyle{(a)} for lettered endnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." + +The format for the \textreferencestyle command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \textreferencestyle{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default +is \textreferencestyle{[1]}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..518c8f518d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \textreferenceposition COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \textreferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote +reference number within the text is a superscript number or not. The format +for the \textreferenceposition command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \textreferenceposition{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \textreferenceposition{up} will give +superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers within the text. +\textreferenceposition{down} will give print the footnote reference numbers +within the text on the baseline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1c6002625d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \notereferenceposition COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \notereferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the +\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine whether the endnote reference +number within the text of the endnotes is a superscript number or not. The +format for the \notereferenceposition command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \notereferenceposition{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \notereferenceposition{up} will give +superscript numbers for the endnote reference numbers in the notes. +\notereferenceposition{down} will give print the endnote reference numbers in +the notes on the baseline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..55dda0ef13 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \referencefont COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \referencefont command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the +footnote reference numbers are printed. The format for the \referencefont +command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \referencefont{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..79eb463bae --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \textreferenceplacement COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \textreferenceplacement command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote +reference number within the text is placed before or after the footnote +reference word. The format for the \textreferenceplacement command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \textreferenceplacement{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is either "before" or "after". \textreferenceplacement{after} will +place the footnote reference number after the word in the text. +\textreferenceplacement{before} will place the footnote reference number before +the referenced word in the text. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8b29d46327 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \notereferencefont COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \notereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the +\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the font in which the endnote +reference numbers in the text of the notes are printed. The format for the +\notereferencefont command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \notereferencefont{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a3d8622991 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \referencestyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \referencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the +footnote reference numbers are printed. There are four possible numbering +styles: + \referencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." + \referencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." + \referencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..." + \referencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." + +The format for the \referencestyle command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \referencestyle{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is one of the four valid style designations given above. The +default is \referencestyle{(1)}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b827caaa77 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \textreferencefont COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \textreferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the +footnote reference numbers in the text are printed. The format for the +\textreferencefont command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \textreferencefont{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0728adcc36 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \notereferencestyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \notereferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the style in which the +endnote reference numbers within the notes are printed. There are six possible +note numbering styles: + \notereferencestyle{1} for numbered endnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." + \notereferencestyle{[1]} for numbered endnotes "[1], [2] ..." + \notereferencestyle{(1)} for numbered endnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." + \notereferencestyle{a} for lettered endnotes "a, b, c, ..." + \notereferencestyle{[a]} for lettered endnotes "[a], [b] ..." + \notereferencestyle{(a)} for lettered endnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." + +The format for the \notereferencestyle command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \notereferencestyle{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default +is \notereferencestyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5cef5c7d45 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \textreferencestyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \textreferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the +footnote reference numbers within the text are printed. There are six possible +text numbering styles: + \textreferencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." + \textreferencestyle{1.} for numbered footnotes "1., 2., 3., ..." + \textreferencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." + \textreferencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..." + \textreferencestyle{a.} for lettered footnotes "a., b., c., ..." + \textreferencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." + +The format for the \textreferencestyle command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \textreferencestyle{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default +is \textreferencestyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1c9007ef54 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \notereferencegutter COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \notereferencegutter command is always used in conjunction with the +\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the amount of space between +the endnote reference number and the text of the endnotes. The format for the +\notereferencegutter command is: + + \endnoteformat{ + \notereferencegutter{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is any number and valid TeX measurement (in, pc, pts, etc.). +\notereferencegutter{1em} is the default and will give one emspace between the +endnote reference numbers and the text of the notes. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..beddf74b27 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \notereferenceposition COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \notereferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the +\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote +reference number within the text of the footnotes is a superscript number or +not. The format for the \notereferenceposition command is: + + \footnoteformat{ + \notereferenceposition{xx} + } + +Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \notereferenceposition{up} will give +superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers in the notes. +\notereferenceposition{down} will give print the footnote reference numbers in +the notes on the baseline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..00b597ddac --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + HELPMARK D1 ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| autoendnote | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\aenã% + +Parameters: ã|textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \autoendnote markup adds notes to the end of a document or the end +of a chapter. It has one parameter, the text of the endnote, which it +places in working storage to be printed when called by \printendnotes. An +endnote reference number is placed in the text where the markup occurred. +By default this reference number is surrounded by square brackets. The +endnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of +\autoendnote. + + ã|Example:ã% +There is a well-marked division of +labor.\autoendnote{Such as it is. Things could be +different in the geological world, but they are not.} +Details of organization have evolved by an +optimization . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| There is a well-marked division of labor.[1] Details of organization | +| have evolved by an optimization . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The endnote printed following the next \printendnotes markup would look +like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. Such as it is. Things could be different in the geological world, but | +| they are not. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +You cannot use \autoendnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox, \asisbegin, +\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign, +\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin. + The endnote number is reset to 1 at the beginning of each part. To +reset the endnote number outside of a \part, use the \setendnotenumber +markup. + Use the \endnoteformat markup to change the \autoendnote style. + There are occasions when you need to include a very long endnote. If +the endnote exceeds 2,048 characters in length, you will need to split the +note into two parts as follows. First, at the beginning of your document +you will need to include a special definition for a new markup. You may +give it any name you choose. For this example, we'll define a markup called +\continue. Enter these three lines at the top of the document: + +\catcode'*=11 +\let\continue=\en*w +\catcode'*=12 + +Next, break the endnote into paragraphs of not more than 2,048 characters +each. In the source below, the sentence beginning "First paragraph" is +the first paragraph with not more than 2,048 characters, and the second +paragraph beginning "Second paragraph" is the last paragraph of the endnote. + +line containt the note.\autoendnote{First paragraph +of a very long endnote . . . } +\continue{Second paragraph of the long endnote, +which will print in the \printendnotes after +the first paragraph} +Sentence following the word "note." diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0e764aa0b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| autofootnote | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\afnã% + +Parameters: ã|textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \autofootnote markup adds footnotes to a page. The footnote can be +placed anywhere within text, without interrupting formatting. When the +document is formatted, the place of the footnote is marked with a number. +The text of the note is put at the bottom of the page. The footnote number +will be automatically incremented by one for each use of \autofootnote. + + ã|Example:ã% +communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm, +rank, and sexual desire --- among themselves by +means of nonsyntactical signals.\autofootnote{such +as crashing together} Individuals are aware of +members and nonmembers of their group. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual | +| desire --- among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals.(1) | +| Individuals are aware of members and nonmembers of their group. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The footnote would print as follows at the bottom of the page: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| 1. such as crashing together | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The text of the note must be enclosed with curly braces, otherwise following +text will be taken as footnote text, until all available space for footnotes +is exhausted. + You cannot use \autofootnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox, +\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign, +\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin. + The footnote number is reset to 1 at the beginning of each part. To +reset the footnote number outside of a \part, use the \setfootnotenumber +markup. + To change the footnote style, use the \footnoteformat markup. + When using \monospace, the footnote in the text of the document is +surrounded by parenthesis, instead of superscripted. The previous \auto- +footnote sample output would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual | +| desire --- among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals.(1) | +| Individuals are aware of members and nonmembers of their group. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dc70ed9c37 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| asisbegin | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\aibã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \asisbegin markup forces the following text into an unformatted block. +Each line is printed as it was entered. Line breaks and interword spacing +are honored. TEXT1 markup within an "as is" sequence is limited to +\verticalspace, \verticalspacekeep, \autofootnote, and font changes. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\monospace + +\centerline{Elements of the Spheres} + +\vs{12pt} +\asisbegin +Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere +Oxygen 62.10 60.60 +Hydrogen 01.10 00.10 +Sodium 00.001 00.400 +\asisend ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Elements of the Spheres | +| | +| | +| | +| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere | +| Oxygen 62.10 60.60 | +| Hydrogen 01.10 00.10 | +| Sodium 00.001 00.400 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The columns will only line up if you are using \monospace or \typewriter. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you use accents while in \asisbegin, you must surround the accented +letter with curly braces. + +lowest common denominator. +\vs{12pt} +\centerline{\bd Outline} +\aib +\vs{6pt} +The Morality of Rock in the Fossil Record + Elementary Concepts: Toasting the \c{C}rust + Principles of Population Geology +\aie ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +| lowest common denominator. | +| | +| | +| Outline | +| | +| The Morality of Rock in the Fossil Record | +| Elementary Concepts: Toasting the Crust | +| Principles of Population Geology | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + + ã|Notes:ã% +With the monospaced font you can use the "as is" sequence to have TEXT1 +obey precisely your text placement, including space between words. With +proportionally spaced fonts only the lead blanks would line up; blanks +"inside" the text would be different widths (depending on the width of +previous characters). + + Font changes within an \asisbegin may change the horizontal spacing. + Every \asisbegin must have a matching \asisend. + You cannot use \asisbegin within any of the following markup: \appen- +dix, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox, \figure, +\footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part, \preface, +\rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada, \subheadb, +\subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3fd9d98509 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| asisend | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\aieã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \asisend markup ends an "as is" series. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\aib + This fortress built by Nature for herself + Against infection and the hand of war, + (Richard II) +\aie ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| This fortress built by Nature for herself | +| Against infection and the hand of war, | +| (Richard II) | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Each \asisend must have a matching \asisbegin. Omitting the ending \asisend +will produce the following error message: + +(\end occurred inside a group at level 2) +Output written on TEXT1$$.dvi (1 page, 436 bytes). +Transcript written on TEXT1$$.texlog. + +See \asisformat to modify the defaults for \asisbegin and +\asisbegin. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..17657f596f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| asisformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\aifã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everyasis, \skipafterã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \asisformat markup allows you to modify the "as is" block. The "as is" +markup skips 1 blank line (a baseline) before and after the series. There +is no indentation from the left. + +\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a +block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. The default skip +is 6pt. If you are using \monospace, the default skip is 1\bl. + +\everyasis{Nested Markup} determines how the 'as is' text is printed. This +submarkup is only valid within the asisformat markup. Spacing and font +changes are allowed, but not justification, right indentation, or other +paragraph information. + +\skipafter indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a +block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. The default skip +is 6pt. If you are using \monospace, the default skip is 1\bl. + + ã|Example:ã% +In this example, the "as is" text is to be indented 7 picas from the left +margin, the text is to be printed in ten point typewriter, and 4 points +skipped before and after. + +\asisformat{\skipbefore{4pt} + \everyasis{\leftindent{7pc}\tenpt\tt} + \skipafter{4pt}} + +Consider my favorite breakfast recipe: +\cl{\bd Muckles} +\asisbegin +3 eggs beaten +1 cp cream +1 cp flour +1/4t baking powder +1 T sugar +pinch of salt + +bacon (optional) +\aie +Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. +Pour all of +the batter into the pan. Cook approximately +10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces +and serve hot with plenty of syrup. ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Consider my favorite breakfast recipe: | +| Muckles | +| | +| 3 eggs beaten | +| 1 cp cream | +| 1 cp flour | +| 1/4t baking powder | +| 1 T sugar | +| pinch of salt | +| bacon (optional) | +| | +| Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. Pour all of the batter into the | +| pan. Cook approximately 10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces and | +| serve hot with plenty of syrup. | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +The \asisformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are +used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7acf33349e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\subheadcformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadc +titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is: + + \subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{xxx} + } + +where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadc is +\numberingstyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d1e541a8c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the +\subheaddformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadd +titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is: + + \subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{xxx} + } + +where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadd is +\numberingstyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cad86ce1cc --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| appendixformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\apfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \appendixformat markup allows you to modify the default markup that +controls the appearance of the appendix title. The submarkup is described. + +\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from capital letters, the +default, to Arabic numerals (1) or roman numerals (I). + + ã|Example:ã% + +\appendixformat{\numberingstyle{I}} + +\appendix{Glossary} + +If this were the fourth appendix, it would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Appendix IV | +| Glossary | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the appearance of the appendix title +banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center- +line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within +or outside of \appendixformat: + + * \appendixnumberprints the most recent appendix number. + + * \appendixtitleprints the most recent appendix title. + +\incontents determines whether the appendix title is to be included in the +contents. The default can be changed to no to inhibit the appendix title +from being included in the contents. See the second example below. + + ã|Example:ã% +In this example, the appendix starts a new page, the number and title are +centered in bold, and one line is skipped afterwards. + +\appendixformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + + \cl{\bd \appendixnumber. \appendixtitle} + \vs{1\bl} + } + \incontents{yes} + } + +\app{Glossary} + +This would print the fourth appendix as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 4. Glossary | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +In this example, the appendix starts a new page (instead of using +\dumpinsertseject, skips down the page 2 inches, centers the title in +italics, and skips one line. The title is not put in contents. + +\appendixformat{ + \titleformat{\newpage + \vsk{2in} + \cl{\it \appendixtitle} + \vs{1\bl}} + \incontents{no} } + +\app{Glossary} + +This would print the fourth appendix as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Glossary | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \appendixformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both +are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a190f27416 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| appendix | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\appã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \appendix markup starts a new page, centers the title in bold and +adds the title text to the table of contents. Appendices are lettered +consecutively. This markup can be used as often as necessary. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Instead, let humanity strive to make good places, +"eutopias," on earth, peacefully and in good spirit. +\par +\appendix{Calculations from "Nuclear Winter"} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Appendix A | +| Calculations from "Nuclear Winter" | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to the \appendixformat markup if you need to change the appendix +style. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a72ac7f09e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|APPENDIXã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\appendixformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4e5ea240db --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| appendixformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\appendixformatÅ\numberingstyleÅAÌ + \titleformatÅ\dumpinsertseject + \centerlineÅ\twelvept\bold + Appendix \appendixnumberÌ + \centerlineÅ\twelvept\bold\appendixtitleÌ + \vsÅ 1\blÌ + \setchapternumberÅ 0Ì + \setsubheadanumberÅ 0Ì + \setsubheadbnumberÅ 0Ì + \setsubheadcnumberÅ 0Ì + \setsubheaddnumberÅ 0Ì + \setfigurenumberÅ 0Ì + \settablenumberÅ 0Ì + Ì + \incontentsÅ yesÌ +Ì + +Abbreviation: ã|\apfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \appendixformat markup allows you to modify the default markup that +controls the appearance of the appendix title. The submarkup is described. + +\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from capital letters, the +default, to Arabic numerals (1) or roman numerals (I). + + ã|Example:ã% + +\appendixformatÅ \numberingstyleÅ IÌÌ +\appendixÅ GlossaryÌ + +If this were the fourth appendix, it would print as: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Appendix IV | +| Glossary | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\titleformatÅNested MarkupÌ controls the appearance of the appendix title +banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center- +line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within +or outside of \appendixformat: + + * \appendixnumberprints the most recent appendix number. + + * \appendixtitleprints the most recent appendix title. + +\incontents determines whether the appendix title is to be included in the +contents. The default can be changed to no to inhibit the appendix title +from being included in the contents. See the second example below. + + ã|Example:ã% +In this example, the appendix starts a new page, the number and title are +centered in bold, and one line is skipped afterwards. + +\appendixformatÅ \numberingstyleÅ 1Ì + \titleformatÅ \dumpinsertseject + \clÅ \bd \appendixnumber. \appendixtitleÌ + \vsÅ 1\blÌ + Ì + \incontentsÅ yesÌ + Ì +\appÅ GlossaryÌ + +This would print the fourth appendix as: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 4. Glossary | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +In this example, the appendix starts a new page (instead of using +\dumpinsertseject, skips down the page 2 inches, centers the title in +italics, and skips one line. The title is not put in contents. + +\appendixformatÅ + \titleformatÅ \newpage + \vskÅ 2inÌ + \clÅ \it \appendixtitleÌ + \vsÅ 1\blÌÌ + \incontentsÅ noÌ Ì +\appÅ GlossaryÌ + +This would print the fourth appendix as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Glossary | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \appendixformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both +are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cf6437cf5f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|ASIS-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the \asisformat +and if you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c3aeeea9b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|ASIS-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the \asisformat +and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2522f00c01 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| bold | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\bdã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \bold markup sets the typeface to wide strokes, giving a heavy +impression. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example changes "Parallels" bold. It is changed back with the \roman +markup. + +lowest common denominator. +\par +\bold\nin Parallels. \roman Consider for a +moment rocks and deer . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| lowest common denominator. | +| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +The effects of the \bold markup can also be limited by curly braces. + +lowest common denominator. +\par +\nin{\bd Parallels}. Consider for a +moment rocks and deer . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| lowest common denominator. | +| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Note in the last example the period follows the right curly brace (}.). +This is necessary to enable the extra spacing which normally follows +punctuation. + Bold is often used for display titles or special emphasis. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..277feefcba --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| bolditalic | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\biã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \bolditalic markup sets the typeface to wide strokes and an italic +slant, giving a heavy impression. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example changes "Parallels" to bold italic. It is changed back with +the \roman markup. + +lowest common denominator. +\par +\bolditalic\nin Parallels. \roman Consider for a +moment rocks and deer . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| lowest common denominator. | +| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . | +| --------- | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +All font sets have \bolditalic defined as a valid type face. Not all font +sets, however, have bolditalic available. Those font sets that do not +have bolditalic will give the following warning message when you try to use +\bolditalic or \bi: + +<TEXT1> Warning. No bold italic font in CM12. Will print italic font .) diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c827c2717e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| bibliography | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\bibã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \bibliography markup starts the bibliography on a new page, centers and +prints the title in bold face, and enters the title in contents. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\bibliography{References} +\frenchspacing +\bibentry +Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes +in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical +Publications, International. + +\bibentry +Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's +Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601. +\par + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| References | +| | +| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | +| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | +| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. | +| 11:455--601. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than the +one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the \bibliographyformat +markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a7106a2db9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \bibentry Markup | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation:ã|\bieã% + +Parameters:ã|noneã% + +Description: The \bibentry markup is used to separate each entry in a +bibliography with a vertical skip; an entry is in the form of a hanging +paragraph. + +Example: + + \bibliography{Bibliography} + ã|\bibentryã% + Illite, Ivan. 1911. ''Pickingthe Philosopher's + Stone.'' {\it Mining Truth}.11:455--601. + ã|\bibentryã% + \sameauthor + 1978. ''Pet rocks astherapy tools.'' + {\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78. + ã|\bibentryã% + Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. {\itGravel and Nothingness: + An Existential Theory}. Dayton:Gabbro Press. + \par + + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Bibliography | +| | +| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining | +| Truth. 11:455--601. | +| 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology Today. | +| 10:71--78. | +| | +| Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential | +| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + +ã|Notes:ã%The series is ended with a \par markup. Without the \par an + error results. + + You may use the \sameauthor markup to indicate that the author of one + quotation is the same as the previous author. + + To disable the double spacing which normally follows punctuation, use + the \frenchspacing markup. The example illustrated for the + \bibliography markup was done using \frenchspacing. + + If you need to print yourbibliography with a format different than + the one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the + \bibliographyformat markup. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d8d0303319 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|BIBLIOGã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\bibliographyformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..40eff62e82 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| \bibliography{title} | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation:ã|\bibã% + +Parameters:ã|titleã% + +Description: The \bibliography markup starts the bibliography on a new +page, centers and prints the title in bold face, and enters the title +in the table of contents. + + Example: + ã|\bibliography{ã%Referencesã|}ã% + \frenchspacing + \bibentry + Grabens, Gruss M. 1970.{\it Mechanical Processes + in the Human Geomechanism}.Winston: Geomedical + Publications, International. + \bibentry + Illite, Ivan. 1911. ''Pickingthe Philosopher's + Stone.'' {\it Mining Truth}.11:455--601. + \par + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| References | +| | +| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | +| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | +| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|Notes:ã%If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than + the one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the + \bibliographyformat markup. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| \bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes} | +| \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject | +| \cl{\twelvept\bd \bibtitle} | +| \vs{\bl}} | +| \everybibentry{\vs \bl}\goodbreak\hp\nin} | +| \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex | +| depth-.5ex}} | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------| + +Abbreviation:ã|\bifã% + +Parameters: submarkup + +Submarkup: \incontents, \titleformat, \everybibentry, \sameauthorrulesize + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cda2435221 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| bibentry | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\bieã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \bibentry markup is used to separate each entry in a bibliography with a +vertical skip; an entry is in the form of a hanging paragraph. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\bibliography{Bibliography} +\bibentry +Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's +Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601. +\bibentry +\sameauthor + +1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." +{\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78. +\bibentry +Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. {\it Gravel and Nothingness: +An Existential Theory}. Dayton: Gabbro Press. +\par ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Bibliography | +| | +| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. | +| 11:455--601. | +| | +| ....1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology Today. 10:71--78. | +| | +| Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential Theory. | +| Dayton: Gabbro Press. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The series is ended with a \par markup. Without the \par an error results. + You may use the \sameauthor markup to indicate that the author of one +citation is the same as the previous author. + To disable the double spacing which normally follows punctuation, use +the \frenchspacing markup. The example illustrated for the \bibliography +markup was done using \frenchspacing. + If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than the +one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the \bibliographyformat +markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2cbb983d68 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| bibliographyformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\bifã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\incontents, \titleformat, \everybibentry, +\sameauthorrulesizeã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \bibliographyformat markup controls the style of the entire +bibliography. The following submarkup is only valid within \bif. + +\incontents by default adds the title text to the contents. The default is +yes; to keep the title from appearing enter "no": + +\bibliographyformat{\incontents{no}} + +\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the format of the bibliography title. +The default skips to a new page, centers the title in bold, and skips one +line. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \centerline +within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or +outside of \bibliographyformat: + + * \bibtitleprints the title entered with the \bibliography markup. + +\everybibentry{Nested Markup} controls the format of each bibliographic +entry. The default permits breaking between entries and creates a hanging +paragraph for the entry. You may use markup such as \verticalspace, +\hangingparagraph, \item, \goodbreak, \noindent, \label, \leftindent within +\everybibentry as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside +of \bibliographyformat: + + * \bibnumberprints the current \bibentry number. + +\sameauthorrulesize sets the height, width, and depth of a horizontal line +used to indicate a repeat of an author's name. + + ã|Example:ã% +The following markup produces entries similar to the default but numbered. +A period and a tie (tilde, for a connecting space) join the number to the +text. + +\bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes} + \titleformat{\np + \cl{\bd \bibtitle} + + \vs{\bl} + } + \everybibentry{\goodbreak\hp\nin\bibnumber.~} + \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex} +} + +Then when you use \bibentry, you would get: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | +| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| 2. Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. | +| 11:455--601. | +| 3. Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology | +| Today. 10:71--78. | +| 4. Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential | +| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +This example also numbers entries, but it uses labels instead of hanging +paragraphs. The \labelformat is changed under \titleformat to accommodate +numbers. This layout is useful for bibliographies that use identifiers in +place of numbers. + +\bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes} + \titleformat{\np\vsk{1in} + \cl{\bd \bibtitle} + \vs{\bl} + \labelformat{\labelwidth{22pt}}} + \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label{\bibnumber}} + \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}} + +Then when you use \bibliography, you would get: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| References | +| | +| 1. Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | +| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | +| 2. Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential | +| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +You can specify in the \everybibentry markup that the bibentry number is to +be surrounded by parenthesis or square brackets. + \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label{(\bibnumber)}} ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| References | +| | +| (1) Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | +| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | +| (2) Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential | +| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +You could also use \label to indicate citations that carry an alphanumeric +label by omitting the parameter to \label in the \everybibentry markup. + +\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\cl{\bd \bibtitle} + \vs{\bl} + \labelformat{\labelwidth{50pt}}} + \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label} + \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}} + +Then use the \bibentry markup as though it had a parameter: + +\bibliography{Citations}\frenchspacing +\bibentry {Grabe70} +Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes +in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical +Publications, International. +\bibentry{Illit11} +Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's + +Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601. +\bibentry{Morai78} +Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." +{\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78. + +and the citations will look like: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Citations | +| | +| Grabe70 Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | +| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | +| Illit11 Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining | +| Truth. 11:455--601. | +| | +| Morai78 Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." | +| Geopsychology Today. 10:71--78. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +Another popular style groups all of an author's citations together. This +can be accomplished in a similar manner as previously defined. The +difference being that the \rt markup is used. + +\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\vsk{1in} + \cl{\bd \bibtitle} + \vs{\bl} + \labelformat{\labelwidth{50pt}}} + \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label} + \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}} +\bibliography{Citations}\frenchspacing +\vs{.5\bl} +\nin OSBORNE, J.S. +\bie{\rt{1971.}} +{\it Introduction to Aesthetic Anthropology}. Boston, Ma: +Addison-Wesley Pub. Co. +\bie{\rt{1978.}} +A survey of tribal masks used by Brazilian tribes. + +Pages 160--169 in {\it Cultural Anthropology}. +M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row. +\vs{.5\bl} +\nin OTTEN, C.M. +\bibentry{\rt{1971.}} +{\it Anthropology and Art: Readings in Cross Cultural +Aesthetics}. Garden City, N.Y.: +The Natural History Press. + +and the citations will look like: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Citations | +| | +| OSBORNE, J.S. | +| | +| 1971. Introduction to Aesthetic Anthropology. Boston, Ma: Addison-Wesley | +| Pub. Co. | +| | +| 1978. A survey of tribal masks used by Brazilian tribes. Pages 160--169 | +| in Cultural Anthropology. M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: | +| Harper and Row. | +| OTTEN, C.M. | +| | +| 1971. Anthropology and Art: Readings in Cross Cultural Aesthetics. | +| Garden City, N.Y.: The Natural History Press. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +This final style makes use of an \everybibentry similar to the default. In +this example, the paragraph and hanging indents are set to different values +(by default they are equal). The other difference is that \noindent is +omitted. + +\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\cl{\bd \bibtitle} + \vs{\bl} + \psk{\bl}\pin{10pt}\hin{20pt}} + \everybibentry{\par\goodbreak\hp\indent} + \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}} +\bibliography{Bibliography}\frenchspacing +\vs{\bl} \nin Asher67 +\bie +Asherson, G. L., and S. H. Stone. 1967.\linebreak +Dessensitization {\it in vitro}. {\it Immunology}. +13:469. {\it Cultural Anthropology}. M. Zateh and +F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row. +\vs{\bl} +\nin Cinad68 + +\bie +Cinader, B., editor. 1968.\lbr +Regulation of the Antibody Response. Charles C. Thomas, +Publisher, Springfield, Ill. + +and the citations will look like: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Bibliography | +| | +| Asher67 | +| Asherson, G. L., and S. H. Stone. 1967. | +| Dessensitization in vitro. Immunology. 13:469. Cultural Anthropology. | +| M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row. | +| | +| Cinad68 | +| Cinader, B., editor. 1968. | +| Regulation of the Antibody Response. Charles C. Thomas, Publisher, | +| Springfield, Ill. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \bibliographyformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if +both are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d635af3511 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ + Menu for BOTHPAGES Commands -- TEXT1 + +A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character +of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when +a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that +doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP +COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and +options type HELP HELP. + + +runningheadformat (running top title options) +runningfootformat (running bottom title options) diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d9ee022c0d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \bottommargin (\bma) COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \bottommargin (\bma) command will set the distance from the bottom of the +page to the last line of the text. This command has the format: + + \bottommargin{uu} + +where "uu" is any unit of TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.) or number of +lines. The default bottom margin is one inch, or \bottommargin{1IN}. This +command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX input file before any +actual text is entered. + +In order to change the bottom margin from the default of one inch to one-half +inch, you would enter: + + \bma{.5in} + +Which would give you one-half inch between the last line of text on the page +and the bottom of the page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ae217363f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after +the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the +\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) +commands. This command has the format: + + \bothpages{ + \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}} + }} + +where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the +bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and +"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle +line. For example: + + \runningtitleformat{\bothpages{ + \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}} + }} + +will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and +put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the +current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the +bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 5 would look like this: + +Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5 diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a8c4432f10 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after +the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the +\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) +commands. This command has the format: + + \evenpages{ + \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}} + }} + +where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the +bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and +"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle +line on all even pages. For example: + + \runningtitleformat{\evenpages{ + \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}} + }} + +will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and +put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the +current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the +bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 4 would look like this: + +Joe Smith June 3, 1984 4 diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..949dd41432 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after +the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the +\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) +commands. This command has the format: + + \oddpages{ + \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}} + }} + +where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the +bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and +"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle +line on all odd pages. For example: + + \runningtitleformat{\oddpages{ + \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}} + }} + +will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and +put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the +current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the +bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 5 would look like this: + +Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5 diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..afd01a8162 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| blockquotebegin | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\bqbã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \blockquotebegin markup ends a paragraph and forces the following text +into a quote format, indicated by a change in the size of type to 10pt, 6 +points of spacing before and after the quote, and margin indentations of 24 +points. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Salt (1958) names the process: +\blockquotebegin +This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. +Most metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it + +can also occur in forms in trenchcoats. +\paragraph +The lithosphere---dermosphere in humans---wrinkles +over time. +The process is one-way, as rehydration will not +unwrinkle the surface. +\blockquoteend +As far as general surface alteration, only the +time scale differs between the human . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Salt (1958) names the process: | +| | +| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most | +| metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in | +| forms in trenchcoats. | +| The lithosphere---dermosphere in humans---wrinkles over | +| time. The process is one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle | +| the surface. | +| | +| As far as general surface alteration, only the time scale differs | +| between the human . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Every \blockquotebegin must have a matching \blockquoteend. If the quote is +not ended with \blockquoteend, all following text is formatted as a block +quote, and a warning message appears at the end of formatting which says: + +(\end occurred inside a group at level 1) +Output written on TEXT1$$.dvi (1 page, 436 bytes). +Transcript written on TEXT1$$.texlog. + + The defaults for \blockquotebegin differ when you are using \monospace. +With \monospace, there is no font change, one line is skipped before and +after the block quote, and the left and right indentations are both 1 2 +inch. + Refer to the \blockquoteformat for instructions on how to change the +block quote style. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c10fddc23b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| blockquoteend | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\bqeã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \blockquoteend markup ends the quote and returns text to the normal +margins and sizes. Text following is formatted as a new paragraph. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Salt (1958) names the process: +\blockquotebegin +\rightragged +This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. +Most metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it +can also occur in forms in trenchcoats. + +\paragraph +The lithosphere --- dermosphere in humans --- +wrinkles over time. +The process is one-way, as rehydration will not +unwrinkle the surface. +\blockquoteend +As far as general surface alteration, only the +time scale differs between the human . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Salt (1958) names the process: | +| | +| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most | +| metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in | +| forms in trenchcoats. | +| The lithosphere --- dermosphere in humans --- wrinkles over | +| time. The process is one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle | +| the surface. | +| | +| As far as general surface alteration, only the time scale differs | +| between the human . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fdae8155cc --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| blockquoteformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\bqfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everyblockquote, \skipafterã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \blockquoteformat markup controls the formatting of block quotes. The +following submarkup are effective only within block quotes. + +\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a +block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. + +\everyblockquote{Nested Markup} determines how the text of the quote is +formatted. You can specify justification or raggedness, single or double +spacing, left or right indentation, paragraph spacing and indentation, and +any font change needed within block quotes. You may use any markup such as +\tenpt, \interlineskip, \leftindent or \rightindent within \everyblockquote. + +\skipafter indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a +block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. + + ã|Example:ã% +The indentation has been changed in this sample. The text for the block +quote is to be printed right ragged in 9 point Computer Modern. Paragraphs +within the block quote, and only within, have a 1 pica paragraph indent and +zero paragraph skip. The skips before and after the quotation have been set +to zero. + +\blockquoteformat{\skipbefore{0pt} + \everyblockquote{\pin{1pc}\psk{0pt}\ninepoint + \leftindent{1pc}\rightindent{1pc}\rr} + \skipafter{0pt}} + +The example illustrated for \blockquotebegin would then begin: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Salt (1958) names the process: | +| | +| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most metamorphosis | +| occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in forms in | +| trenchcoats. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +This sample is printed with a small interlineskip, normal paragraph values +and zero indentation. The text is in 9 point italics with an interlineskip +of 9.5 points. + +\blockquoteformat{\skipbefore{0pt} + \everyblockquote{\ssp\ninept\it\isk{9.5pt} + \leftindent{0pt}\rightindent{0pt}} + \skipafter{0pt}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Salt (1958) names the process: | +| | +| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most metamorphosis | +| occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in forms in trenchcoats. | +| | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \blockquoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both +are used. + The defaults for \blockquoteformat when using \monospace are different. +The space before and after is one blank line (1\bl), the left and right +indents are 36 points ( 1 2 inch), and the text is in the roman font since +you cannot print \tenpt with \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..605bacc116 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|BQUOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\blockquoteformat and if you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..879bbe76b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|BQUOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\blockquoteformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..96925e779d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| break | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +If you want to force TEXT1 to break between lines at a certain point in the +middle of a paragraph use the markup \break. + + ã|Example:ã% + +To everything there is a season, and a time +to every purpose under the +heaven: A time to be born, and a time to +pluck up {\it that which is}\break +planted; A time to kill, and a time to heal; +a time to break down, and +a time to build up; A time to weep, +and a time to laugh; + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| To everything there is a season, and a time to every purpose under | +| the heaven: A time to be born, and a time to pluck up that which is | +| planted; A time to kill, and a time to heal; a time to break down, and a | +| time to build up; A time to weep, and a time to laugh; | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +To avoid having the white space between the words as is illustrated in the +third line in the above example, use the \linebreak markup. + For more on the \break markup, refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b4b0c741fd --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadcformat +command and will set options for the subheadc titles. The format for the +\titleformat command is: + + \subheadcformat{\titleformat{ + \vsk{24pt} + {\subheadctitle} + \vs{12pt}} + } + +This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadc command will space down 24 +points, print the \subheadctitle and space down 12 points to resume with the +text. + +For more information on the \subheadctitle command, see the help screen under +the markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f51b183132 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheaddformat +command and will set options for the subheadd titles. The format for the +\titleformat command is: + + \subheaddformat{\titleformat{ + {\it \subheaddtitle:} + } + +This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadd command will start a new +paragraph, print the \subheaddtitle in italics followed by a colon and then +resume with the text. + +For more information on the \subheaddtitle command, see the help screen under +the markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..03d57913d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| bullet | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\bulã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \bullet markup produces a raised centered dot as an identifier for an +item in a list. + + ã|Example:ã% + +the following necessary trace elements: +\listbegin +\bul Copper +\bul Manganese +\bul Selenium +\bul Zinc +\listend + +\nin The mineral content of the body . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| the following necessary trace elements: | +| * Copper | +| * Manganese | +| * Selenium | +| * Zinc | +| The mineral content of the body . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +A list of bullets must be placed within the \listbegin and \listend markup. +The bullets are indented 5 characters, like the first level of an ordered +list. Bullets may also be used in outline lists where they are indented +5 characters from the previous level by default. Refer to the \listformat +markup to change the amount of indentation. + + When in math mode, the \bullet markup is used in the same fashion as +described in The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..29255b1074 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| caps | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ccã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \caps markup sets the typeface to "caps/small caps". + + ã|Example:ã% +This example changes "Parallels" to caps/small caps. It is changed back +with the \roman markup. + +lowest common denominator. +\par +\nin\caps Parallels. \roman Consider for a +moment rocks and deer . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| lowest common denominator. | +| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Caps/small caps are often used for display titles or special emphasis. It +should not be used for the body of text. Not all font sets have small +caps available. Those font sets that do not have small caps will give the +following warning message when you try to use \caps or \cc: + +<TEXT1> Warning. No small caps font in CMSAN8. Will print roman font .) diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ac5118d383 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| cents | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup is used to print a cent sign. + + ã|Example:ã% +This machine takes 35\cents\ instead of 25\cents. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| This machine takes 35c instead of 25c. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \cents markup must be followed either by a backslash-space, or by a +tilde (~). diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..51aba6b4c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| chapter | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\chapã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \chapter markup starts a new page, centers the title in bold face, +and enters it in the table of contents. The text of a title is the only +parameter. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Anything less is more realistic. +\par +\chapter{Nationalism} +Nationalism is directly related to war. +Lord Acton observed that nationalism aims solely . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter 1 | +| Nationalism | +| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | +| nationalism aims solely . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you want to force TEXT1 to split a long chapter title at a place of your +choosing, use \linebreak. + +\chapter{Subject Index\linebreak +and\lbr +Concordance} ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter 1 | +| Subject Index | +| and | +| Concordance | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to \chapterformat on the next page to change the chapter style. + Each time you use \chapter it resets the subhead numbers to zero. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e801d05132 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|CHAPTERã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\chapterformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c20cd7f815 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| chapterformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} + \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl} + \setsubheadanumber{0} + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + \incontents{yes}} + +Abbreviation: ã|\chfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \chapterformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that controls +the appearance of the chapter title. The submarkup is described. + +\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from Arabic numerals, the +default, to letters {A} or roman numerals {I}. + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{A}} + +\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the appearance of the chapter title +banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center- +line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within +or outside of \chapterformat: + + * \chapternumberprints the most recent chapter number. + + * \chaptertitleprints the most recent chapter title. + +\incontents places the chapter title in contents (if one is printed). +Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." + +\chapterformat{\incontents{no}} + + ã|Example:ã% +When you enter, + +\chapter{Introduction} + +you get the default chapter style which looks like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter 1 | +| Introduction | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +In the following example this default style has been modified such that each +chapter starts on a new page, the title is centered in bold (no chapter +number printed), and one line is skipped after the chapter title. + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + + \titleformat{\newpage + \cl{\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl}} + \incontents{yes}} + +Then each time you specify \chapter you will get: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Introduction | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +In this sample, each chapter title is prefaced by the chapter number. As +before, the title is centered in bold, and one line is skipped before text. + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\newpage + \cl{\bd\chapternumber.~\chaptertitle} + + \vs{1\bl}} + \incontents{yes}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. Introduction | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \chapterformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are +used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..55451d7c10 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +6/22/90: + +1) removed filemana.helpmark diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1f487912fe --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadcformat +command and will determine whether subheadc titles are included in the Table of +Contents. The format for the \incontents command is: + + \subheadcformat{ + \incontents{yes} + } + +By default, the subheadc titles will not be included in the Table of Contents. +If you want the subheadc titles included in the Table of Contents, enter +\incontents{yes} within the \subheadcformat command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b6061267cc --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheaddformat +command and will determine whether subheadd titles are included in the Table of +Contents. The format for the \incontents command is: + + \subheaddformat{ + \incontents{no} + } + +By default, the subheadd titles will not be included in the Table of Contents. +If you want the subheadd titles included in the Table of Contents, enter +\incontents{yes} within the \subheaddformat command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..67836f2dfe --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| centerline | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\clã% + +Parameters: ã|textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \centerline markup ends the previous paragraph and places equal blank +spaces on both sides of a word or phrase on a single line. This markup is +useful for titles and emphasis. The only parameter for this markup is the +text to be centered. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\centerline{SOCIOGEOLOGY\lbr +Minerals and Human Behavior} +\vs{12pt} +\centerline{by Achilles Chert} +\vs{24pt} + +"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| SOCIOGEOLOGY | +| Minerals and Human Behavior | +| | +| by Achilles Chert | +| | +| | +| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +You may use \linebreak within \centerline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e4216ca42c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| centerlinesbegin | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\clbã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \centerlinesbegin markup ends the previous paragraph and starts a series +of centered lines. This markup is useful for titles and emphasis. There +are no parameters. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\centerlinesbegin +SOCIOGEOLOGY +Minerals and Human Behavior +\vs{18pt} +Achilles Chert + +\centerlinesend +\vs{24pt} +"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| SOCIOGEOLOGY | +| Minerals and Human Behavior | +| | +| | +| Achilles Chert | +| | +| | +| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Each \centerlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \centerlinesend. + + You can also use \centerlinesbegin before a \drawbox or \paragraphbox, +but not within either markup. + You cannot use \centerlinesbegin within any of the following markup: +\appendix, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox, +\figure, \footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part, +\preface, \rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada, +\subheadb, \subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\centerlinesbegin +\paragraphbox{John H. Whalley +{\it publishing vice president} +\vs{\bl} +John B. Dykeman +{\it associate publisher}} +\centerlinesend + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| John H. Whalley | +| publishing vice president | +| | +| John B. Dykeman | +| associate publisher | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bd7f8b0633 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| centerlinesend | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\cleã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \centerlinesend markup ends a series of centered lines and returns to a +paragraph mode. There are no parameters. + + ã|Example:ã% + +The prerequisites to operate this hardware are: +\vs{2\bl} +\clb +6085 Professional Computer System +ViewPoint Software +VP Document Editor Software +Signed Software License Agreement + +\cle + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The prerequisites to operate this hardware are: | +| | +| | +| 6085 Professional Computer System | +| ViewPoint Software | +| VP Document Editor Software | +| Signed Software License Agreement | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0c9c11c617 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|CONTENTSã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\tableofcontentsformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0dc940202f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| countinglines | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\coulã% + +Parameters: ã|statusã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup is used to start counting lines for line numbering in the margin +of a document. Status is true or false. + + ã|Example:ã% +To start line numbering you enter + +\countinglines{true} + + ã|Notes:ã% + +Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is +ignored for all other printers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3cd7e700ae --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| drawbox | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\dbã% + +Parameters: ã|textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +A box is a grouping of rules into a square or rectangle. You can draw a box +with the \drawbox markup. The parameter for this markup is the material to +be put inside the box. Any grouping less than a paragraph can be boxed, +including letters, sentences, figures, or tables. + + ã|Example:ã% +To draw a box around an "a", you would enter: + +Draw a box around \drawbox{a} ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ..... | +| Draw a box around . . | +| ..... | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you want to draw an empty 1 inch square (plus the box "rule size" and +"mat size") you could enter, + +\db{\vrule width 0pt height 1in +\vrule width 1in height 0pt depth 0pt} + .............. + . . + . . + . . + . . + . . + . . +which prints: .............. + + ã|Notes:ã% +Do not use this markup with \monospace or around \settabs or \halign. + Paragraphs cannot be boxed with \drawbox unless each one is put in a +vertical box (see \vbox). Use the \paragraphbox markup instead. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..46df8d2cf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| drawboxmat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\dbmã% + +Parameters: ã|unit of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \drawboxmat markup determines the amount of space between the rule and +the text. This is the area that has been shaded in the illustration at the +bottom of the page. This space is used with the \drawbox and \paragraphbox +markup. The default is 3 points. + + ã|Example:ã% +\drawboxmat{20pt} +Draw a box around \drawbox{a} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ......... | +| . . | +| . a . | +| . . | +| Draw a box around ......... | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..88a1713cba --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| drawboxrulesize | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\dbrsã% + +Parameters: ã|unit of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \drawboxrulesize markup determines the thickness of the rule that makes +up the box itself. The default is .4 point. This rule thickness is used by +both \drawbox and \paragraphbox. + + ã|Example:ã% +\drawboxrulesize{2pt} +Draw a box around \drawbox{a} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ..... | +| . a . | +| Draw a box around ..... | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9278cca2bd --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| dumpinsertseject | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\dieã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup is used to dump (print) all accumulated figures and tables +(inserts) entered with \figure, \topinsert or \midinsert. After printing +the figures and other inserts, a new page is started. If no inserts had +been accumulated, a new page is still started. This markup appears in many +of the format markup, such as \chapterformat. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} + \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl} + \setsubheadanumber{0} + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0} + } + \incontents{yes} + } + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \topinsert and \midinsert markup are discussed in The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f9f2cbc586 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| doublespace | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\dspã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The doublespace markup leaves alternate line spaces blank. This markup +causes a break in text. There are no parameters. Double spacing will be in +effect until changed with a \singlespace markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +\singlespace +All things considered, Camus has derived +a solid conglomerate of grail theories +for us. +\doublespace + +Let me close with another penetrating insight from +Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, +because of the inevitability of entropic direction. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| All things considered, Camus has derived a solid conglomerate of grail | +| theories for us. | +| | +| Let me close with another penetrating insight from Camus: The rock | +| | +| should be left at the bottom, because of the inevitability of entropic | +| | +| direction. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..349690ca9b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| ellipsis | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\elã% + +Parameters: ã|nã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Ellipsis points indicate any omission of a word, line, or paragraph from +a quoted passage. Three points are used when the omission occurs with a +sentence or fragment. Four points are used when the omission is a whole +sentence or more, including whole paragraphs. + In using the \ellipsis markup, n may be "3" or "4". The \ellipsis3 +markup inserts three points, surrounded by appropriate spacing. ( . . . +) The \ellipsis4 markup inserts four points, immediately after a sentence, +with space after the last point. ( . . . . ) + + ã|Example:ã% +The following quote has been shortened with ellipses. + +names the process: +\blockquotebegin +This loss of fluids is known as aging\ellipsis4 +The lithosphere\ellipsis3 wrinkles over time. +The process is one-way, as rehydration will not +unwrinkle the surface. +\blockquoteend +As far as general surface alteration, only the . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| names the process: | +| | +| This loss of fluids is known as aging . . . . The | +| lithosphere . . . wrinkles over time. The process is | +| one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle the surface. | +| | +| As far as general surface alteration, only the . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +No additional space is required around the ellipsis markup, since space is +included. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4faefbc558 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| endnoteformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\endnoteformat{\skipbefore{4pt} + \textreferenceposition{down} + \textreferencefont{\rm} + \textreferencestyle{[1]} + \notereferenceposition{down} + \notereferencefont{\tenpt} + \notereferencestyle{1.} + \notereferencegutter{1em} + \everyendnote{\tenpt\pin{0pt}\lin{1.2em}}} + +Abbreviation: ã|\enfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \textreferenceposition, +\textreferencefont, \textreferencestyle, \notereferenceposition, \noterefer- +encefont, \notereferencestyle, \notereferencegutter, \everyendnoteã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \endnoteformat markup allows you to modify the shape and presentation of +endnotes generated with \autoendnote. + +\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a +block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. + +\textreferenceposition determines if the endnote reference number is +superscripted or not. By default, the reference is not superscripted. If +you want the endnote reference number to be superscripted, then change the +parameter to "up". + +\textreferencefont lets you change the face or size. By default the +endnote reference number is always printed in the standard font. + +\textreferencestyle determines the numbering style at the end of a chapter +or the end of the document (wherever the \printendnotes appears). There are +five possible values: + 1. "1" for numbered endnotes + 2. "(1)" for numbered endnotes with parentheses + 3. "[1]" for numbered endnotes with square brackets + 4. "a" for lettered endnotes + 5. "(a)" for lettered endnotes with parentheses +The default is Arabic numerals in square brackets. + +\notereferenceposition determines if the endnote reference number is +superscripted or not when it is printed at the end of a chapter or the end +of a document. By default, the reference is not superscripted. If you want +the endnote reference number to be superscripted, then change the parameter +to "up". + +\notereferencefont lets you change the face or size. By default the +endnote reference number printed at the end of a chapter (or end of a +document, wherever \printendnotes occurs) is always printed in the standard +font. + +\notereferencestyle determines the numbering style. There are five +possible values: + 1. "1." for numbered endnotes + 2. "(1)" for numbered endnotes with parentheses + 3. "[1]" for numbered endnotes with square brackets + 4. "a" for lettered endnotes + 5. "(a)" for lettered endnotes with parentheses +The default is numbered endnotes. + +\notereferencegutter specifies the amount of space between the endnote +number and the endnote text. The gutter is illustrated here as the shaded +portion between "1." and "The first step": ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ... | +| 1....The first step . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\everyendnote lets you modify the shape of the notes. You can change the +type face, the paragraph parameters, and the right and left indentation. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example shows an endnote style with a superscripted endnote number; the +body of the endnote in a 9 point Computer Modern set; the endnote at the end +of the document (or chapter) indented half an inch from the left and half an +inch from the right of the rest of the body of the text; the endnote body +right ragged; and the text of the document right justified and in 10 point + +Computer Modern. The endnote "text" reference at the end of the chapter +will retain the default style ("1." not superscripted). + Note that 9 point was specified within both the "notereferencefont" and +"everyendnote" markups. The "notereferencefont" determines the font that +the endnote reference number is to be printed in. The "everyendnote" markup +determines the font that the endnote text is to print in at the end of the +document or end of chapter, wherever the next \printendnotes markup appears. + +\endnoteformat{\skipbefore{12pt} + \textreferenceposition{up} + \textreferencefont{\ninepoint\rm} + \textreferencestyle{1} + \notereferenceposition{down} + \notereferencefont{\ninepoint\rm} + \notereferencestyle{1.} + \everyendnote{\rightragged + \pin{0pt}\psk{12pt}\ninepoint + \leftindent{.5in}\rightindent{.5in}} + } + + +| . . automatically sets an interline skip 2 points greater | +than the font size.\autoendnote{This extra space is +referred to as leading.} The default font size is . . . + +The endnote in the document would look like: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| . . . automatically sets an interline skip 2 points greater than the | +| font size. The default font size is . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +The endnote printed after the \printendnotes markup would look like: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. This extra space is referred to as leading. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \endnoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are +used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8afb34d2bf --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|ENOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\endnoteformat and if you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2c37af8a98 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|ENOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\endnoteformat and if you areã|noteã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4dae99a110 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| emptypage | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\epã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \emptypage markup advances the page count, leaving an "empty" page, +which can be placed with custom figures or diagrams. There is no break in +text. There are no parameters for this markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +To float an empty page, enter the sequence: +same proportions (Figure 2, on the following page). +\par +\emptypage +This suggests parallels in evolution. + +Generally speaking, there are three +possible solutions . . . + + ã|Example:ã% +To have an empty page print immediately between the sentence ending "page)." +and the one beginning "This suggests . . . " you would enter follow the +\emptypage with a \newpage: +same proportions (Figure 2, on the following page). +\par +\emptypage +\newpage +This suggests parallels in evolution. +Generally speaking, there are three +possible solutions . . . + + ã|Notes:ã% +Unlike \newpage, if you enter two \emptypage markup in a row, you will get +two empty pages when the page is ejected. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3e9165e6a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| evenpagemargin | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\epmã% + +Parameters: ã|measurementã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup is used to indicate where a document's line numbering is to be +printed on even pages. The default is 50.8 points from the left edge on +even pages. + + ã|Example:ã% +To indicate that you want line numbering to start at 1 inch from the left +edge you would enter at the beginning of your document: + +\evenpagemargin{1in} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is +ignored for all other printers. + Valid values for \evenpagemargin are 0 to 2 to the 32d power points, +practical values are 5-860 points. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e56dd2f3e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| extension | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\exã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \extension markup sets the face to the Computer Modern Math Extension +face. Refer to The TEXbook, Appendix F, for a complete list of the +characters available in the Extension face. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example uses \extension to print an "O dot": + +Put a {\extension\char'113} next to . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Put a K next to . . . | +| | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +For more on the use of the \char markup, refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..049452e975 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| figureformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\figureformat{\skipbefore{1\bl} + \position{\float} + \titleformat{\bqb\hp\tenpt + \bd Figure \figurenumber. + \rm\figuretitle \bqe} + \incontents{yes} + \skipafter{1\bl} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\fifã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \position, \titleformat, +\incontents, \skipafterã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \figureformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the +appearance of the figure. The submarkup is described. + +ã|\skipbeforeã% indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a +figure block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. + +ã|\positionã% By default, text is floated around a figure and the figure +printed at the top of the next page if not enough room remains on the +current page to print the figure. If you do not want text to float around +the figure, and you want the figure to print exactly where you place it, use +\position{\nofloat}. + +\figureformat{\position{\nofloat}} + +ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% controls the appearance of the figure title. +You may use markup such as \blockquotebegin, \hangingparagraph, \vertical- +space, and \centerline within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup +you may use within or outside of \figureformat: + + * \figurenumberprints the most recent figure number. + + * \figuretitleprints the most recent figure title. + +ã|\skipafterã% indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing the +figure title. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. + +ã|\incontentsã% places the figure title in contents (if one is printed). +Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." + + ã|Example:ã% +The amount of space skipped before and after has been reduced to 6 points +(half a line with 12 point interline space), the figure number is placed in +\label and the figure title is printed in italics. + +\figureformat{\skipbefore{6pt} + \titleformat{\label{\bd Figure \figurenumber.} + \it\figuretitle} + \skipafter{6pt} + \incontents{yes} + } + +\figure{\halign{\ctr{#}&&\hs{1em}\ctr{#}\cr +July 23&July 27&July 31&August 5&August 9\cr +32&67&44&47&18\cr}{Size data of a Yellow + +Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9, +1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| July 23 July 27 July 31 August 5 August 9 | +| 32 67 44 47 18 | +| | +| Figure 1. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the period of | +| July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \figureformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are +used. If you are using \monospace, the only difference in defaults is + +that the figure title is printed in the roman \monospace font instead of +\tenpt. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..be6fe909ea --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| figure | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\figã% + +Parameters: ã|first parameter = markup + second parameter = the figure titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +A figure is a representation or illustration. The \figure markup can leave +space for a figure, number it, print the figure title, and ensure that the +title gets placed in the contents. The figure markup has two parameters: +markup and the title of the figure. + The "markup" can be a \verticalspace markup, \fullpage, \halfpage, or +text such as a table, etc. The "title" is the title of the figure which +will print at the bottom of the figure and in the table of contents. + If you want a figure on an entire page, enter \fullpage as the first +parameter. If you want a figure to fill half of the page, enter \halfpage +as the first parameter. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you want to use \asisbegin, it must go outside of the figure and the +title cannot be more than one line long. + +\aib +\figure{\tt + clay + Human + pressure + parent rock + temperature +}{Origin of the Stone Species} +\aie + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| clay | +| Human | +| pressure | +| parent rock | +| temperature | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| Figure 1. Origin of the Stone Species | +| | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +This figure leaves half an inch of space above the title, "Size data of a +| . . ". | + +the same proportions. +\db{\figure{\vs{.5in}}{Size data of a Yellow +Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9, +1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)} +This suggests parallels . . . } + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| Figure 2. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the | +| period of July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +This figure leaves an entire empty page for the figure. The title would +print at the bottom of the figure. + +the same proportions. +\figure{\fullpage}{Origins of the Human Species} +This suggests parallels . . . + + ã|Example:ã% +This figure leaves a half page empth for the figure. The title would print +at the bottom of the figure. + +the same proportions. +\figure{\halfpage}{Origins of the Human Species} +This suggests parallels . . . + + ã|Notes:ã% + +By default, text "floated" is text that is moved in front of a figure. The +figure is moved to the top of the current page if there is room left. If +not enough room remains, then the figure is printed at the top of the next +page. To disable this floating process, refer to the \figureformat markup. + For both \halfpage and \fullpage, the figure title is included in +determining how much space to leave. + By default, each new \part will start numbering figures over again at 1. +Use \setfigurenumber to reset the figurenumber outside of parts. + When figures are using the default "float" method of placing figures, +you cannot use \twocolumns or \threecolumns in parameter 1. If you +are using the \nofloat option specified in \figureformat you may use the +multiple column specifications. + Use the \figureformat markup to modify the figure style. + You can not use \settabs within \figure. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c9c8c14c17 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|FIGURE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\figureformat and if you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b8785b18b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|FIGURE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\figureformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..15063d06b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| fixedformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\fixfã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +TEXT1 offers two multiple column formats that have different text handling +capabilities. The normal (default) style is called "flexibleformat". This +is described with \twocolumns and \threecolumns markup. There is an +optional style you can use called "fixedformat." The flexible format can be +changed to the fixed format by inserting the markup \fixedformat before the +first two or three column markup appears. + The Fixed format makes each column act as if it were a single page. +Inserts and footnotes will appear in each column just as they would in the +single column format. Only the running head and running foot will print +across the full width of the page. + + ã|Notes:ã% + +Since each column is handled like a normal single column page, the columns +may not be balanced. A short right hand column will remain short when +formatting is completed. + The Fixed format cannot be used to format combinations of single, +double, and triple columns on the same page. The two column and three +column markup can be used in conjunction with one another, but not on the +same page. If both format markup appear on the same page, TEXT1 will fill +the bottom of the current column on the current page with white space and +change to the new format on the following page. + Once the fixed format has been specified, it will remain in force for +the remainder of the document. The Fixed format cannot be changed to the +Flexible format again within the same document. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a1d3bd0491 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| footnoteformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\footnoteformat{\skipbeforedivider{12pt} + \skipafterdivider{2.6pt} + \footnotedivider{144pt} + \textreferenceposition{up} + \textreferenceplacement{after} + \textreferencefont{\tenpt} + \textreferencestyle{1} + \notereferenceposition{down} + \notereferencefont{\tenpt} + \notereferencestyle{1.} + \notereferencegutter{1em} + \everyfootnote{\tenpt\pin{20pt} + \lin{0pt}} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\fnfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\skipbeforedivider, \skipafterdivider, +\footnotedivider, \textreferenceposition, +\textreferenceplacement, \textreferencefont, +\textreferencestyle, \textreferencegutter, +\everyfootnote, \notereferenceposition, +\notereferencefont, \notereferencestyle, +\notereferencegutterã% + + ã|Description:ã% +To change the footnote style and any of the other footnote formatting +options of the \autofootnote markup, use the \footnoteformat markup. The +default footnote format is: + +ã|\skipbeforedividerã% determines the distance between the last line of text +on a page and the footnote divider rule which is printed just before the +footnotes. The default for this markup is 12 points. + +ã|\skipafterdividerã% determines the distance between the footnote divider rule +and the first footnote. The default for this markup is 2.5 points. + +ã|\footnotedividerã% determines the length of a short rule that separates the +footnotes from text. The default value is 144 points (2 inches). + +ã|\textreferencepositionã% determines if the footnote reference number is a +superscript or not. By default, the reference is superscripted (up). If +you want the footnote reference number to be on the baseline, change the +parameter to "down". The default for \monospace is "down". Do not change +it to "up" for \monospace. + +\textreferenceplacement determines if the footnote reference number +precedes or follows the word being noted. By default, the reference +will follow the noted word. If you want the footnote reference number to be +placed before the word being noted, then change the parameter to "before". + +ã|\textreferencefontã% lets you determine how to print the footnote number. +The default is the roman face at 10 point. For \monospace, the default is +the roman typewriter printer face. + +ã|\textreferencestyleã% determines the numbering style. There are four +possible values: + 1. "1" for numbered superscripted footnotes + 2. "(1)" for numbered footnotes surrounded with parentheses + 3. "a" for lettered footnotes + 4. "(a)" for lettered footnotes surrounded with parentheses +The default is \textreferencestyle{1} for composing printers. Typewriter +printers using \monospace have a default of \textreferencestyle{(1)}. + +ã|\notereferencepositionã% determines whether the footnote reference number in +the note is a superscript or not. By default, the reference is on the +baseline. If you want the footnote reference number to be superscripted, +change the parameter to "up". Do note specify "up" for typewriter printers +using \monospace. + +ã|\notereferencefontã% lets you determine what font to print the footnote +number in. The default is standard face at 10 point. For \monospace, the +default is the roman typewriter printer face. + +ã|\notereferencestyleã% determines the numbering style for the notes. There +are four possible values: + 1. "1" for numbered superscripted footnotes + 2. "(1)" for numbered footnotes surrounded with parentheses + 3. "a" for lettered footnotes + 4. "(a)" for lettered footnotes surrounded with parentheses +The default is \textreferencestyle{1.}. + +\notereferencegutter sets the distance between the footnote number and the +first word of text of the note. The gutter is illustrated here as the +shaded portion between "1." and "The first step": + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| .... | +| 1....The first step . . . | +| .... | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The default is one em space, \notereferencegutter{1em}. + +\everyfootnote{Nested Markup} sets the style for everyfootnote. You can +change the type face, the paragraph parameters, and the right and left +indentation. The default text size is 10 point; each note is in paragraph +format, with an indent of 20 points. Typewriter printers which must use +\monospace may not change to another font set. + + ã|Example:ã% +The following example uses a footnote style that prints a superscripted +footnote number in the text and the note, the body of the footnote in +nine-point Computer Modern set, the footnote at the bottom of the page +indented 36 points from the left and 36 points from the right of the rest of +the body of the text of the document, the footnote body right ragged, and +the text of the document right justified and in 10 point Computer Modern. +The \footnoteformat block is modified thus: + +\footnoteformat{\skipbeforedivider{18pt} + \footnotedivider{144pt} + \textreferencefont{\ninepoint\rm} + \notereferenceposition{up} + \notereferencefont{\ninepoint\rm} + \everyfootnote{\rightragged\pin{0pt} + \psk{12pt}\ninepoint + \leftindent{36pt}\rightindent{36pt}}} + +Note that \ninepoint was specified within both the \textreferencefont and +\everyfootnote markups. The \textreferencefont determines the font that the + +footnote reference number is to be printed in. The \everyfootnote markup +determines the font that the footnote text is to print in at the bottom +of the page. Most often the fonts specified in \textreferencefont and +\everyfootnote are the same font. + + ã|Notes:ã% +This markup modifies the style of the \autofootnote markup, not the +\footnote markup. + The \footnoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if +both are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..caeff296f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|FNOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\footnoteformat and if you are using \monospace. This affects +how \autofootnote prints, not how \footnote prints. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c0997c3c8f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|FNOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\footnoteformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. This affects +how \autofootnote prints, not how \footnote prints. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3d6b584379 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| font | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|user markup name and font nameã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \font markup can be used to allow you to make use of a specific font +available on your printer. You should always consult the font catalog for +the fonts available on your printer. The name given in the font catalog +goes where font name is with the \font markup. The user markup name you +must provide. It should be a unique name. + + ã|Example:ã% +To use the fourteen point Sonoran Roman, you can assign it to the markup +name \bigfont by entering, + +\font \bigfont = sonr14 + +\bigfont Palouse Region: + +and you will get: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Palouse Region: | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +To use the ten point Computer Modern Sanserif Demibold Condensed you can +assign it to a markup name \demifont by entering, + +\font \demifont = cmssdc10 + +\demifont Palouse Region: + +you will get: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Palouse Region: | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \font markup does not change the interline skip. A font established +with \selectspecificfont does. + This markup is described further in The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..16ef399cb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|FONT-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default +\monospace font. You usually shoudn't have to do this. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c39de10783 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|FONT-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default +proportional space font. You might want to do this if you want to have +a FONT-P TEXBLOCK on your own disk to be included for each job. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b9135f7c0b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| footnote | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|first parameter = reference mark + second parameter = footnote textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \footnote markup can be used to create marked footnotes. There are two +parameters; the first is the reference mark, and the second is the text of +the note itself. Each parameter is surrounded with curly braces ({}). If +more than one reference mark is used on the same page, they should appear in +the prescribed order: + * asterisk (*) + * dagger (\dagger) + * double dagger (\ddagger) + * section sign (\S) +Refer to the example in the TEXT1 Users' Guide or Reference Manual for +real sample output. These characters are not available at your terminal. + + ã|Example:ã% +Using the above prescribed order, the second footnote on a page would be +entered with \footnote as: + +by Achilles Chert\footnote{\dagger}{pH.d., Litmus Sci. +The author is with the School of Pyroclastic +Philosophy at the University of Piedmont.}. +\par +\nin "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert +Camus, a novelist who lionized the labors of +Sisyphus in moving the igneous concretion up the +declivitous landmass. + +In the document, the text would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| by Achilles Chert . | +| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, a novelist who | +| lionized the labors of Sisyphus in moving the igneous concretion up the | +| declivitous landmass. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +At the bottom of the page the footnote would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| pH.d., Litmus Sci. The author is with the School of Pyroclastic | +| Philosophy at the University of Piedmont. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \footnoteformat has no effect on \footnote. \footnoteformat is used to +change the style of the \autofootnote markup. + + You cannot use \footnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox, +\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign, +\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin. + Refer to the The TEXbook for more on the \footnote markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e46eaba641 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| fraction | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\fracã% + +Parameters: ã|numerator/denominatorã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \fraction markup is another method of specifying a fraction. If you +enter "@1\over2@" you get " 1 2 ". Entering "1/2" will give you "1/2". To +get "1/" you specify "\fraction1/2 ~". + + ã|Example:ã% +Consider my favorite breakfast recipe: + +\tabskip 3em plus 2em minus 2em +\halign{\lft{#}&\lft{#}\cr +\multispan2\ctr{\bd Muckles}\cr +3 eggs&beaten\cr +1 cp&cream\cr +1 cp&flour\cr + +\fraction1/4 t&baking powder\cr +1 T&sugar\cr +\multispan2\lft{pinch of salt}\cr +\multispan2\lft{bacon (optional)}\cr} +Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. +Pour all of +the batter into the pan. Cook @ approximately @ +10 minutes at 375@^\circ@. Cut into pieces +and serve hot with plenty of syrup. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Muckles | +| 3 eggs beaten | +| 1 cp cream | +| 1 cp flour | +| 14 t baking powder | +| 1 T sugar | +| pinch of salt | +| bacon (optional) | +| Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. Pour all of the batter into the | +| pan. Cook approximately 10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces and | +| serve hot with plenty of syrup. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +There must be a space following the fraction as you enter it. In the above +example there had to be a space before the "t&baking powder\cr". diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fe55209b7e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| frenchspacing | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By default, TEXT1 will double space after hard punctuation, unless the +letter prior to the punctuation is a capital letter. To make all +interword spacing the same, regardless of punctuation, you can enter +the \frenchspacing markup. This will turn off the extra spacing +following punctuation for the rest of a document or until TEXT1 sees a +\nonfrenchspacing markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +Consider this bibliographic entry: + +\bibentry + +Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes +in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical +Publications, International. + +Without \frenchspacing it might print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | +| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +If you had specified \frenchspacing, + +\frenchspacing +\bibentry +Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes +in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical +Publications, International. + +it would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | +| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d5c020dfa7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| goodbreak | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \goodbreak markup indicates a good place for page or line breaks. TEXT1 +will then break there only if necessary. This markup must be preceded by a +\par or vertical skip for a page break. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example will break the page before the last paragraph beginning "The +comparison may seem", if it comes close to the bottom of the page. + +\par +\nin{\bd Parallels.} +\par + +Consider for a moment rocks and deer. +Both form cooperative groups that furnish the +landscape . . . +The fruits of cooperation depend on conditions of +the environment. +\par +\goodbreak +The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate +oversimplification . . . + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f3f45f42ea --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| halign | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\halign{ preamble\cr + tabular text\cr} + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|preamble, tabular text, submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\lft, \ctr, \rt, \cr, \noalign, \tabskip, +\omit, \multispan, \phantom, && (column repeat)ã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \halign markup is a way of making tables without tabbing. A preamble, +or sample line, is included immediately after \halign to act as a template +for the text in each column. Each successive column in a row begins with an +ampersand (&). Column descriptions may contain horizontal spaces, indents, +quads, and horizontal fills. Each column description must have a pound + +sign (hash mark, #) which acts as a reference variable, so that text can be +substituted. + The halign is read in its entirety. Every column is treated as a box +whose width is equal to the largest entry. + Besides horizontal mode markup such as \indent, you can use the +following submarkup in the \halign. + +\lft in the preamble will left justify each entry in a column. + +\ctr in the preamble will center each entry in a column. + +\rt in the preamble will right justify each entry in a column. + +\cr marks the end of the preamble, and the end of each row. + +\noalign is used outside of the preamble. It allows you to enter vertical +mode text into a table. You must not end a \noalign with a \cr. For +example, if you wanted to skip a blank line between two row entries, you +would use \noalign{\vs{\bl}}: + + +1000&32\cr +\noalign{\vs{\bl}} +2000&43\cr + +\tabskip puts an equal amount of space (glue) between columns. A +specification of + +\tabskip 20pt plus 15pt minus 10pt + +indicates that the each column is set 20 points apart. If after the initial +try it is determined that the table is still narrower than the width of the +page, up to an additional 15 points of space is put between columns to try +and get the table to spread across the entire page. If after the initial +try of 20 points between each column it is determined that the table is +too wide to fit on the page, up to 10 points is subtracted from the space +between each column to try and get the table to fit on the page. + +\omit can be used to disable to preamble specification for that column +and row. \omit only works for one column of one row. For example, if a +preamble + +\halign{\lft{#}&\rt{#}\cr + +was specified, then to center a header over a column, you could enter + +\omit\ctr{Header 1}&\omit\ctr{Header 2}\cr +1000&2000\cr + +\multispan is used to permit spanning of several columns. For example, if +you had a preamble of + +\halign{\rt{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}\cr + +and you wanted to center a title over the second and third columns, you +would enter: + +first column&\multispan2\ctr{Spanned title}\cr + +\phantom is used in decimal alignment. For example, + +00.1234&12.231\cr +72.8\phantom{000}&1.2\phantom{00}\cr + +would print the partial table: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 00.1234 12.231 | +| 72.8 1.2 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +&& is used to indicate that the following column preamble is to be repeated +for each of the remaining of columns. For example, if you wanted the first +column centered, the second column left justified, and the next five columns +right justified, you could enter + +\halign{\ctr{#}&\lft{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}& + \rt{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}\cr + +Using the column repeat indicator (&&) you can simplify this to + +\halign{\ctr{#}&\lft{#}&&\rt{#}\cr + +This specification then says that columns 3, 4, etc. all use the same +preamble, "\rt{#}". + + ã|Example:ã% +This example illustrates \omit, \qquad and \tabskip. + +\tabskip .5in plus .4in minus .3in +\halign{\rt{#}&\qquad\lft{#}\cr +\omit\ctr{Case}&\omit\qquad\ctr{Blast}\cr +\noalign{\vs{2pt}\hrule\vs{2pt}} +5000 MT&500\cr +10000 MT&845--1050\cr } + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| ..........5000.MT.......500............ | +| 10000 MT 845--1050 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% + +This example makes use of \multispan, \indent, +\horizontalspace, \noalign and column repeat (&&). + +\tabletitle{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr +Changes after Exchanges} +\vs{10pt} +\halign{\indent\lft{#}&\hs{2em}\rt{#} + &&\hs{1em}\rt{#}\cr +Case&\multispan4\ctr{Post Detonations (Days)}\cr +Megatonnage&20&100&200&300\cr +\noalign{\vs{10pt}} +1000&-22&8&7&13\cr +3000&9&6&8&10\cr +5000&-7&-26&-20&-11\cr +10000&-24&-45&-26&-9\cr} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Table 1 | +| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) | +| Changes after Exchanges | +| | +| | +| Case Post Detonations (Days) | +| Megatonnage 20 100 200 300 | +| | +| 1000 -22 8 7 13 | +| 3000 9 6 8 10 | +| 5000 -7 -26 -20 -11 | +| 10000 -24 -45 -26 -9 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +\halign takes less computer time than \settabs because it is a basic +TEX command. The advantages to \halign over \settabs are: + + * maximum column widths are calculated automatically; you must measure + the longest entry with \settabs. + * templates are more versatile than \settabs; repeatable information can + be included in the preamble. + * greater flexibility. + Refer to The TEXbook for more about \halign, \cr, \noalign, \tabskip, +\phantom, \omit, \multispan, or && (column repeat). + You can use \autofootnote, \autoendnote, and \footnote inside of an +\halign, so long as they are not also inside an \hbox or \vbox. + Refer to the description of \leader for an example of using \halign with +dot leadering. + See \strut for row alignment. + Do not put a \cr on the same line as \noalign. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..552ad9c2b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| hbox | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|horizontal mode textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \hbox is a TEX markup which, among several uses, can be used to keep a +word together, preventing hyphenations. For example, + +\hbox{low-cut} + +would prohibit hyphenation of "low-cut". It can also be used in math mode +to switch to the roman font. For example, + +@x^{34}+\hbox{lower order terms}@ + +prints as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| x[34]+lower order terms | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +You cannot use \autoendnote, \autofootnote, or \footnote within an \hbox. + You can also specify an \hbox to take up a certain size. For example, + +\hbox to 1in{} + +would create a box one inch wide. Refer to the discussion of \leader for +more on this option of \hbox. + For more on this markup refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..227b7b8040 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| hangingindent | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\hinã% + +Parameters: ã|units of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \hangingindent markup sets the amount of space each line in a hanging +paragraph is indented after the first. The parameter must be a numerical +value with valid units of measure. + + ã|Example:ã% +The first and second hanging paragraph use a hanging indent of 18 points. +The third paragraph uses a hanging indent of 38 points. + +\psk{12pt} +\hangingindent{18pt} +\hangingparagraph + +BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; +or 'gross' as a description of human behavior. +\hangingparagraph +CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; +or to the position of the female bosom in a low-cut +dress. +\hangingindent{38pt} +\hangingparagraph +DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; +or an informal epithet for hairless academics. +\par ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; or 'gross' as a description | +| of human behavior. | +| | +| CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; or to the position | +| of the female bosom in a low-cut dress. | +| | +| DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; or an informal epithet | +| for hairless academics. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The hanging indent will remain in effect until changed with another +\hangingindent markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..54d1467d37 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| hyphenoff | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\hofã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By default, TEXT1 will do hyphenation if necessary to achieve nice line +breaks. The \hyphenoff markup can be used to disable hyphenation. It will +remain this way until a \hyphenon is encountered. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, hyphenation begins this example, + +Direct Access Storage Device (DASD) is a term for long +term file and program storage devices. A more common +term for the same thing is {\it disk}, since the +actual storage components look like platters or disks. + +\par +\hyphenoff +The CP Directory entry for each user indicates what +virtual disks his machine will include. Each disk +is known by its {\it virtual address}. In general, +users will have one 191 virtual disk. +\par +\hyphenon + +will print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Direct Access Storage De- | +| vice (DASD) is a term for long | +| term file and program storage | +| devices. A more common term | +| for the same thing is disk, | +| since the actual storage com- | +| ponents look like platters or | +| disks. | +| The CP Directory entry | +| for each user indicates what | +| virtual disks his machine will | +| include. Each disk is known | +| by its virtual address. In | +| general, users will have one | +| 191 virtual disk. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Compare this output to that of the \hyphenon markup on the next page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b2513733f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| hyphenon | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\honã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By default, TEXT1 will do hyphenation if necessary to achieve nice line +breaks. The \hyphenoff markup can be used to disable hyphenation. It will +remain this way until a \hyphenon is encountered. + + ã|Example:ã% +First print a paragraph without hyphenation and then turn hyphenation on. + +\hyphenoff +Direct Access Storage Device (DASD) is a term for long +term file and program storage devices. A more common +term for the same thing is {\it disk}, since the + +actual storage components look like platters or disks. +\par +\hyphenon +The CP Directory entry for each user indicates what +virtual disks his machine will include. Each disk +is known by its {\it virtual address}. In general, +users will have one 191 virtual disk. + +will print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Direct Access Storage | +| Device (DASD) is a term for | +| long term file and program | +| storage devices. A more | +| common term for the same thing | +| is disk, since the actual | +| storage components look like | +| platters or disks. | +| The CP Directory entry for | +| each user indicates what vir- | +| tual disks his machine will | +| include. Each disk is known | +| by its virtual address. In | +| general, users will have one | +| 191 virtual disk. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +Compare this output with the example for \hyphenoff on the previous page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b4137ea344 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| hangingparagraph | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\hpã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \hangingparagraph markup creates hanging paragraphs, which are the +reverse of normal paragraphs. In a normal paragraph, the first line is +indented but following lines are full measure wide; in a hanging paragraph +the first line is a full measure and the runover lines are indented. +Hanging paragraphs are used for lists, glossaries, and bibliographies. The +\hangingparagraph markup is placed before each item in the text; a \par +finishes the series. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\psk{5pt} + +\hangingparagraph +BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; +or 'gross' as a description of human behavior. +\hangingparagraph +CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; +or to the position of the female bosom in a low-cut +dress. +\hangingparagraph +DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; +or an informal epithet for hairless academics. +\par + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; or 'gross' as a description | +| of human behavior. | +| CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; or to the position | +| of the female bosom in a low-cut dress. | +| | +| DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; or an informal epithet | +| for hairless academics. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The default indentation for \hangingparagraph is 24 points. Use the +\hangingindent markup to change this indentation. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3ba7e489ed --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| hrule | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|dimensionã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \hrule markup draws a horizontal rule across the width of the page. It +is a native TEX markup, and the usage is different in that the parameter is +not surrounded with curly braces. If you do not supply a dimension, TEXT1 +will print the rule across the entire width of the text. By default, the +rule drawn has a thickness (height) of .4pt. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted to draw a three inch rule across the page, followed later with +a rule across the entire width of the page and ending with a thicker rule +across the width of the page you could specify: + +\nin Basic Techniques + +\hrule width 3in +Editing a File +\hrule +The Column Pointer +\vs{2pt} +\hrule height 2pt + +You would get: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| ........................................................................... | +| ........................................................................... | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on \hrule and how to use the "depth" parameter +with the "height" and "width" parameters. + Use \rule instead of \hrule if you are using \monospace. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4e75ab6b32 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| horizontalspace | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\hsã% + +Parameters: ã|units of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The amount of blank space in a line can be varied by the \horizontalspace +markup. This markup works only within the current line; no space will be +carried over if too little remains at the end of the line. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Our barbecues are brick. Our poetry is concrete: +\bqb\nin +\horizontalspace{84pt}pillow tectonics +\hs{48pt}during sleep +\hs{18pt}pillows come together + +\hs{24pt}and move apart +\hs{18pt}like continental plates +\hs{36pt}mountain ranges +\hs{18pt}rise and fall +\hs{24pt}oceans +\hs{18pt}rise and fall +\bqe +\nin Like Gypsum Lee Ooze, art mimics geology. +\par + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Our barbecues are brick. Our poetry is concrete: | +| | +| pillow tectonics during sleep pillows come | +| together and move apart like continental plates | +| mountain ranges rise and fall oceans rise and fall | +| | +| Like Gypsum Lee Ooze, art mimics geology. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +\horizontalspace can be used in \settabs and \halign. + If you are using \monospace, then the units of measure should be +specified in tenths of an inch or in em's. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9eaca127ef --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| hsize | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|dimensionã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \hsize markup is a native TEX markup that can be used to change the +width of the text on the printed page. This markup does not use delimeters. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you were entering text in a \vbox and you wanted it printed in a 3 inch +column instead of the default column width you could specify "\hsize=3in". +For example, + +Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back +of this publication. You can help us continue to improve +the quality of our documentation, and we welcome all +comments and suggestions. + +\vs{\bl} +\vbox{\hsize=3in +Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back +of this publication. You can help us continue to improve +the quality of our documentation, and we welcome all +comments and suggestions.} + +will print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back of this | +| publication. You can help us continue to improve the quality of | +| our documentation, and we welcome all comments and suggestions. | +| | +| Forms for reader's | +| comments are provided at the | +| back of this publication. | +| You can help us continue to | +| improve the quality of our | +| documentation, and we welcome | +| all comments and suggestions. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3b2f58acbf --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| include | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\inclã% + +Parameters: ã|page segment nameã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \include markup will include external page segment files, into a TEXT1 +document. Page segments come from graphics generating programs such as +those produced by GDDM, SAS and MEGACALC. Refer to the GDDM Page Segment +Generation for the IBM 3820 User Note, U-419, for details on how to create a +page segment. + + The format for the \include markup is: + +\include{fn} + + Where fn is the filename of the file to be included into the text +document. It must have a filetype of "PSEG3820". You must leave space +after the page segment to prevent the image from overprinting the following +text of the document. + + ã|Example:ã% +A file called "GRAPH1 PSEG3820 A" contains a SAS/GRAPH image. It is 2 1 2 +inches high, so you would enter: + +. . . in the graph illustrated below: +\par +\include{graph1} +\vs{3.5in} +\noindent +Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . + +In the document you would get: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| . . . in the graph illustrated below: | +| | +| | +| WWW W WWW SSSSSS UUU UUU | +| WWW WWW WWW SSSSS UUU UUU | +| WWWWWWW SSSSSS UUU UUU | +| WWWWW SSSSSSSS UUUUUUUUUU | +| | +| | +| Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +Sometimes you may want to center the graph on the page. To do this you +would subtract the width of the graph from the galleywidth(1) and divide the +difference by 2; then you would do a horizontal skip of that amount (after +entering \null. For the above graph, the galleywidth is 25 picas, the width +of the "graph1" is 19 picas, so the indent is to be 3 picas ( 25pc-19pc +2=3pc ): + +| . . in the graph illustrated below: | +\par +\noindent\hs{3pc} +\include{graph1} +\vs{3.5in} +\noindent +Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + 1. galleywidth=page width - left margin - right margin + +In the document you would get the same graph as above, centered on the page. +Refer to the example below: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| . . . in the graph illustrated below: | +| | +| WWW W WWW SSSSSS UUU UUU | +| WWW WWW WWW SSSSS UUU UUU | +| WWWWWWW SSSSSS UUU UUU | +| WWWWW SSSSSSSS UUUUUUUUUU | +| | +| | +| Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..42c0fbb071 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| indent | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \indent markup creates an empty box of horizontal space whose width is +the current value of \paragraphindent. This markup is useful in tabular +work. + + ã|Example:ã% +\tabletitle{Flea Deaths (in millions)} +\halign{\indent\rt{#}&\qquad\lft{#}\cr +Case&Blast\cr +5000 MT&500\cr +10000 MT&845--1050\cr } +\rule + +\vs{\bl} +These statistics are fairly conclusive. Note, +however, that inconsistencies occurred at . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Table 1 | +| Flea Deaths (in millions) | +| | +| Case Blast | +| 5000 MT 500 | +| 10000 MT 845--1050 | +| ........................................................................... | +| These statistics are fairly conclusive. Note, however, that | +| inconsistencies occurred at . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6d262cedb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|INDEXã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\indexformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4ab3365aa4 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| input | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|filenameã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \input markup indicates a file to be included in the source. The +parameter, a CMS file name with a filetype of TEX, follows \input and a +separator space; no curly braces are used. + Usually the \input markup is used in a "driver" file, which calls parts, +chapters, etc. to create (or drive) the entire document, such as a thesis. +At the top of such a driver file is where you would put modifications to +default format blocks, additional font specifications, and your own markup +definitions. + + ã|Example:ã% +In this example, the file is to have a filename of "DRIVER". It calls all of +the various parts of a 2 chapter document. When formatting, specify DRIVER +as the filename. + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\newpage + \cl{\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl}} + \incontents{yes}} +\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default} +\input preface +\input abstract +\input chapter1 +\input chapter2 +\input bibliog +\input append-a +\input append-b +\input index + + ã|Notes:ã% +If you want to input a file with a filetype other than TEX, you can do so by +adding the filetype after the filename and placing a period between the two. +For example, to input a filename of DATA and a filetype of LISTING, enter + +\input data.listing + + Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..56ed4190d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| interlineskip | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\iskã% + +Parameters: ã|unit of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The spacing between lines (from one baseline to the next, not "single" or +"double spacing") can be changed using the \interlineskip markup. TEXT1 +automatically sets an interline skip usually 2 points greater than the font +size when you use \selectfontset.(1) The default font size is 12 points and +the default interline skip is 14 points. This may be particularly helpful +when using some of the smaller fonts. In general, the shorter the line or +smaller the type, less interline skip is needed. + + ã|Example:ã% + 1. Extra space is referred to as leading, pronounced leding (from the +days when lead was used). + +\interlineskip{11pt} +The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the +geological basis of all social behavior. +It explains human behavior by empirical description +of the attributes of mineral composition. +\par +\interlineskip{13pt} +It is most successful when it provides detailed +description of particulate phenomena and first-order +correlations with features . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the geological basis of | +| all social behavior. It explains human behavior by empirical description | +| of the attributes of mineral composition. | +| It is most successful when it provides detailed description of | +| particulate phenomena and first-order correlations with features . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +\singlespace and \doublespace are dependent on the current setting of +\interlineskip. For example, the \doublespace leading when \interline- +skip{12pt} is 24pt. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4055cb1bbc --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| italic | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\itã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \italic markup sets an Italianate typeface, used for showing emphasis, +conveying a message, attracting attention, or even creating a mood. Italic +type is also good for contrast, and it is also hard to read over large +areas. For printers that do not have italics, underscoring will be used +instead. + + ã|Example:ã% +earlier; +\italic Japan \roman in Southeast Asia (previously in +China, now in the Philippines, + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| earlier; Japan in Southeast Asia (previously in China, now in the | +| ----- | +| Philippines, | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +members communicate important things---{\it +hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual desire}---among +themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| members communicate important things---hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual | +| ------ ----- ---- --- ------ | +| desire---among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals. | +| ------ | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4c0ecd3117 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \italicface (\it) MARKUP | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \italicface (\it) markup will switch to the italic face text font and print +the text following the markup in italics. If the printer does not have an +italic font, a warning will issued and an underscore font will be substituted. + +The format for the \italicface markup is: + + \italicface ttttt + +Everything from the \italicface markup to the next font change will be printed +in italics. If only a word or two are to be printed in italics enclose the +italic face markup and the text that is to be printed in italics within a set +of braces. + + {\italicface ttttt} + +After printing the specified text in italics, TEXT1 will automatically switch +back to the standard face, or Roman font. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..abd96b000b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| item | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|identifierã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \item markup creates unique indented items. The parameters for this +markup is an identifier, such as an Arabic number or letter, supplied by +you. This offers more flexibility. + + ã|Example:ã% +militarily for thousands of years. +Reasons for this continued behavior include: +\item{*} the rapaciousness of society +(as shown by the accumulation of wealth and the +indifference to the poor and nonaggressive) +\item{**} the acceptance of war +\item{***} the economic advantages of large-scale +operations (as shown in industrial applications) +\par +\noindent +The cultures of industrial nations are based on +unethical . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| militarily for thousands of years. Reasons for this continued behavior | +| include: | +| * the rapaciousness of society (as shown by the accumulation of wealth | +| and the indifference to the poor and nonaggressive) | +| ** the acceptance of war | +| *** the economic advantages of large-scale operations (as shown in | +| industrial applications) | +| The cultures of industrial nations are based on unethical . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The indentation for \item is determined by the current setting of paragraph +indent. Each \item forms a hanging paragraph after the identifier. There +is no extra space between items. + Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cb92f5efea --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,311 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| index | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ixã% + +Parameters: ã|title textã% + +Submarkup: ã|\subentry, \blindentry, \uspn, \bdpn, \itpnã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \index markup builds index entries which can be sorted and printed at +the end of a document. The \index markup has the format + +\indexn{entry} + +where "n" is the index number (1, 2, or 3), and "entry" is the index +entry. The page number you are on when the \index markup is inserted will +be printed with the "entry". You must use the \printindex markup to sort +and print the index. It comes at the end of the document. Refer to the +documentation of \printindex for details on this markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +Consider this index example: + +The files you create and change have a filemode of A. +This means that they are all kept in a collection of +files called your A-disk. The FILELIST command +displays a list of all +\index1{A-disk} +the files on your A-disk. + +In the document, the following would print where the index markup occurred, + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The files you create and change have a filemode of A. This means | +| that they are all kept in a collection of files called your A-disk. The | +| FILELIST command displays a list of all the files on your A-disk. | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +If this occurred on page 32, the entry in the index printed with +\printindex1 would print as illustrated on the next page. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| A-disk, 32 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +You cannot use \index within a \settabs or \halign. + +ã|Lower Level or Sub entriesã% + + If you want to record a subentry to a main index entry you use the +\subentry markup within the \index markup. + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \subentry markup is only valid when used within \index. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you had a main entry called "reader list" and you wanted sub entries for +"receiving a file" and "replacing a file" you could enter the \index markup +as illustrated here: + +\sha{Receiving a File} +To receive a file, move the cursor to the line that +describes the file you want to receive. +\index1{reader list \subentry1{receiving a file}} +Then press PF9. A notice will appear on that line +telling you that the file has been received, . . . +\sha{Replacing or Renaming a File} +What happens if the file in your reader has the same file +label as one you already have on your disk? +There are two ways to handle this. +\lib\lil1 +If you want the file in your reader to replace the file +\index1{reader list \subentry1{replacing a file}} +on your disk, type the command "receive / (replace". +\lil1 + +If you want to keep the file on your disk, then rename +the file in your reader with the command "receive / newname +\index1{reader list\subentry1{renaming a file}} +newtype" where "newname" is the new file name and +"newtype" is the new filetype. +\lie + +This would produce the following paragraph in a document: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Receiving a File | +| To receive a file, move the cursor to the line that describes the file | +| you want to receive. Then press PF9. A notice will appear on that line | +| telling you that the file has been received, ... | +| | +| Replacing or Renaming a File | +| What happens if the file in your reader has the same file label as one | +| you already have on your disk? There are two ways to handle this. | +| 1. If you want the file in your reader to replace the file on your disk, | +| type the command "receive / (replace". | +| 2. If you want to keep the file on your disk, then rename the file | +| in your reader with the command "receive / newname newtype" where | +| "newname" is the new file name and "newtype" is the new filetype. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +If list level #2 printed at the top of page 33, the index entries would look +like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| reader list | +| receiving a file, 32 | +| renaming a file, 33 | +| replacing a file, 32 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|Excluding Text from the Sortã% + There are occasions when you will want text to print in an indexed item, +but you do not want that text to be a part of the sorting process. For +example, you may want to index the title "Consumer Guides" including the +quotes, but you want it sorted with the C's and not sorted with the double +quote marks. Also, you probably would want to sort \par with the p's, and +not with the backslashes. Both can be accomplished using the \sortasmarkup +which can only be used within the \index markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +Using the input, + +Please get a copy of the article "Consumer Guides" and +\index1{"Consumer Guides"\sortas{Consumer Guides}} +refer to the illustration on page 5. +\par +Be sure to index the paragraph command "\\par" +\index1{\\par\sortas{par}} +somewhere in the document. + +you would get the following two paragraphs in your document. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Please get a copy of the article "Consumer Guide References" and refer | +| to the illustration on page 5. | +| | +| Be sure to index the paragraph command "\par" somewhere in the | +| document. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The index entries would print like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| "Consumer Guides", 45 | +| contour Maps, 23 | +| | +| \par, 45 | +| Paragraphs, long, 16 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +Prepositions in a subentry may not be part of the sort, but are to be +printed in the index. For example, to get the index to look like, + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| vacations | +| on boats, 32 | +| at the Olympian, 21 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +you would use the \index, \subentry, and \sortas commands illustrated on the +next page. + +Some people spend their vacations at older +hotels like the Olympian. +\index1{vacations \subentry1{at the +Olympian\sortas{Olympian}}} + +Another popular vacation is travelling the +Pacific in a boat. +\ix1{vacations\subentry1{on + boats\sortas{boats}}} + + ã|Example:ã% +As another example, "10 Downing Street" is typically sorted with the T's +and not prior to the 2's. This can also be accomplished using the \sortas +markup. For example, the Prime Minister's address mentioned earlier would +be entered as: + +Taxi, please take me to 10 Downing Street. + +\index1{10 Downing Street\sortas{ten Downing Street}} + +ã|Highlighted Page Numbersã% + For those applications which require some of the page numbers to be +printed in bold, some in italics, and others underscored, there are three +markup available to do this. They are \boldpagenumber, \italicpagenumber, +and \underscorepagenumber. They are all used within the \index markup, and +indicate to TEXT1 that a page number other than the standard page number is +to be used. + We recommend that important references be noted in bold (\boldpage- +number). Fleeting references be printed with italics (\italicpagenumber). +And primary references be indicated by being underscored (\underscorepage- +number). Of course, you are free to use these three markup as you see +fit. + The bold page number will always come prior to a standard face reference +to the same page. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you had an \boldpagenumber on page 43 and \index's on pages 42--44 for +"peace." + +\index1{peace} % Located on page 42 + +\index1{peace} % Located on page 43 +\index1{peace\bdpn} % Located on page 43 + +\index1{peace} % Located on page 44 + +the index printed with \printindex would look like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| peace 43, 42--44 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you have an underscored page number and it falls in the same range as a +standard face entry, the underscored entry would follow the standard face +entry. For example, if you had a \underscorepagenumber on page 66 and +\index's on pages 66--72 for "nationalism", + +\index1{nationalism\uspn} % On page 66 +\index1{nationalism} % On page 66 +\index1{nationalism} % On page 67 +\index1{nationalism} % On page 72 + +the index sequence would print like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| Quick Programming Language 66--72, 66 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you have an index reference in italics and it falls in the same range as +a standard face entry, the italics entry will not be printed. For example, +if you had an italics entry using \italicpagenumber on pages 45 and 56, and +you had standard face entries on pages 54--60 for "In Search of Excellence", +the printed index would look like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| In Search of Excellence 45, 54--60 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|Cross Referencesã% + Often it is desirable to have a cross reference to another index entry. +You can do this using the \blindentry markup within the \index markup. You +cannot use both \blindentry and \subentry within the same \index markup. +The \blindentry markup has the format, + +\blindentry{blind entry} + +where "blind entry" is the text you want associated with that index entry. + + ã|Example:ã% +For example, to get an index entry to print like + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| Flow of control, see Control Structures | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +you would enter + +\index1{Flow of control\blindentry{see Control +Structures}} + + ã|Example:ã% +It is also possible to have a blind entry printed with an index entry, and +still have it indexed with page numbers. For example, if you were to enter + +\index1{Label\uspn} +\index1{Label\blindentry{({\it see also} Case Label)}} + +on page 78 you would get an index entry printed as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| Label, 78, (see also Case Label) | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +If you have page numbers and a blind entry, then the blind entry will follow +the last page number as illustrated here. + +ã|Multiple Indexesã% + You can have multiple indexes by changing the "1" in \index1 to "2" or +"3". For example, + +\index1{entry in first index} +\index2{entry in second index} +\index3{entry in third index} + +will generate one entry in each of three indexes. See \printindex for +instructions on how to print out each of the three indexes. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a57b8f352b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| indexformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ixfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\respectcase, \style, \leadering, \everyhang, +\everyletterbreak, \indentsubentry, \everyindexã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The defaults listed above for each markup applies initially to each of +the three indexes. One or more indexes' defaults can all be changed +by modifying the \indexformat markup. The complete description of the +\indexformat markup and its related submarkup is: + +\indexformatn{format} + +where n is the index (1, 2, or 3) and format is the submarkup. + +ã|respectcaseã% ignores the case of an index entry. This markup can only be +used within the \indexformat markup. If you wanted case respected and have +the lower case letters sorted before the upper case entries (i.e., "boat" +sorted before "Bed") then enter + +\respectcase{yes} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Respecting case applies to all letters. If \respectcase{yes} has been +specified, then "boat" and "cat" will both be sorted before "Bed". The +default value is \respectcase{no} for each of the 3 indexes. + +ã|styleã% regulates the general index format. \style{indent}, the default, +indents each index entry. This style looks like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul | +| alien rule of, 20 | +| Arab invasion of, 19, 31 | +| Crusades and, 22, 57 | +| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + There are two other styles to choose from: "paragraph" and "dash". The +style "paragraph" is a run-on hanging paragraph. You get it by specifying: + +\indexformat1{\style{paragraph}} + +With this style, the above index would look like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Constantinople, 12, alien rule | +| of, 20, Arab invasion of, 19, | +| 31, Crusades and, 22, 57, | +| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31, See | +| also Istanbul | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Note that with this style, the blind entry from the \blindentry submarkup +comes after the subentry, instead of after the main entry as was done for +the "indent" style. + The third style is "dash", an em-dash style. You get it by specifying + +\indexformat1{\style{dash}} + +It is very similar to the default "indent" style, except subentries are +prefaced with an em dash following the initial indent of space. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul | +| ---alien rule of, 20 | +| ---Arab invasion of, 19, 31 | +| ---Crusades and, 22, 57 | +| ---Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|leaderingã% turns on/off dot leadering. The default is "off". You +can change this default only within the \indexformat markup. To have dot +leadering, enter: + +\ixf1{\leadering{yes}} + +If you are using \style{indent} and \leadering{yes} you get: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Constantinople, See also | +| Istanbul ... . ... ... . ....12 | +| alien rule of ... . ... 20 | +| Arab invasion of . . .19, 31 | +| Crusades and .... . .22, 57 | +| Ottoman conquest of .29--31 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Do not use dot leadering with \style{paragraph}. + +ã|everyletterbreakã% is what will be printed between each letter break, +(i.e. between "A" and "B"). By default, one blank line is skipped when +starting a new letter (at each letter break). The \everyletterbreak markup +can only appear within the \indexformat markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +You could modify the default to place a rule and skip between breaks: + +\ixf1{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl} + \hrule width 2in + \vs{\bl}}} + + This would look something like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ..................... | +| alpha, 62 | +| America, 38 | +| Austria, 55 | +| ..................... | +| | +| Bach, 98 | +| Bethlehem, 87 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +Something else you can do with indexes is to make use of the "\nextletter" +submarkup, which gives you the next uppercase character about to be listed +in the sorted index list. For example, between "apple" and "boat" the +value of "\nextletter" would be "B". One application would be to print the +"\nextletter" in a large type. This could be accomplished by changing the +default for "\everyletterbreak" to: + +\indexformat{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl} + \noindent{\twelvepoint\bd\nextletter}\par}} + +The resulting index would look like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| A | +| alpha, 62 | +| America, 38 | +| Austria, 55 | +| | +| B | +| Bach, 98 | +| Bethlehem, 87 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +Another variation of the above would be to draw a box around the next +letter. You could do this by adding \drawbox to \everyletterbreak: + +\ixf1{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl} + \drawbox{\bd\nextletter}\par}} + +and you will get an index that prints as illustrated on the next page. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ..... | +| ..... | +| alpha, 62 | +| America, 38 | +| Austria, 55 | +| | +| ..... | +| ..... | +| Bach, 98 | +| Bethlehem, 87 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The "\nextletter" is always an uppercase letter. + Only letters, not numbers or special characters such as the backslash +(\) are used as \nextletter. + +ã|indentsubentryã% There are two levels of subentries available. The amount +of distance they are indented when you are using the "indent" or "dash" +styles is controlled by the \indentsubentry submarkup. If you are using +the "paragraph" style for the index, the \indentsubentry is ignored. The +definition of this markup is, + +\ixf1{\indentsubentryn{amt}} + +where n is the subentry level, 1 or 2, and amt is the amount to be indented. +The default indent for these two subentry levels is: + +\ixf1{\indentsubentry1{1em} + \indentsubentry2{2em}} + + If, for example, you were using the "indented" style and wanted each +subentry level indented two em's from the previous level, you would enter, + +\ixf1{\indentsubentry1{2em} + \indentsubentry2{4em}} + +which would print the index illustrated earlier as: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul | +| alien rule of, 20 | +| Arab invasion of, 19, 31 | +| Crusades and, 22, 57 | +| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|everyhangã% controls the hanging indent for the primary index level and +each of the two subentry levels. If you had an index entry with many page +numbers, + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Write state- | +| ment, 26, | +| 34--38, 70, | +| 86, | +| 103, 191, | +| 202, 203-- | +| 204, 281 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The hangingindent would be 1.5em by default. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted to increase that value to 3em, you would enter, + +\ixf1{\everyhang{3em}} + +and you would get: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Write state- | +| ment, 26, | +| 34--38, | +| 70, 86, | +| 103, 191, | +| 202, 203-- | +| 204, 281 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|everyindexã% is a list of one or more commands to be executed before +printing the sorted index. By default, \tenpt is the value of \everyindex. + + ã|Notes:ã% +The default type style used with \monospace is \roman instead of \tenpt. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..48b4541b3d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| justify | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\juã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \justify markup makes each line exactly the same length and aligns +both left and right margins vertically. TEXT1 automatically sets pages +with full justification by default. The \justify markup is used to reset +justification after using \rightragged or \leftragged. + + ã|Example:ã% +\rightragged +Setting: Continuation of the narrative of Nehemiah +(c. 420 {\caps b.c.}). +Supplies information on an important epoch in ancient + +Jewish history---the return to Judea after seventy +years of captivity in Babylon. +\justify +Consists of two parts separated by several years: +Chapters 1 to 6, the return of the first caravan under +leadership of Zerubbabel; chapters 7 to 10, an +expedition, sixty years later, conducted by Ezra. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Setting: Continuation of the narrative of Nehemiah (c. 420 b.c.). | +| Supplies information on an important epoch in ancient Jewish history---the | +| return to Judea after seventy years of captivity in Babylon. | +| Consists of two parts separated by several years: Chapters 1 to 6, | +| the return of the first caravan under leadership of Zerubbabel; chapters 7 | +| to 10, an expedition, sixty years later, conducted by Ezra. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +When you specify \justify, text will be justified until TEXT1 sees a +\rightragged or \leftragged. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fce94d1349 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| label | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\laã% + +Parameters: ã|textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \label markup creates labelled paragraphs. Labels will appear to the +left of the paragraph described, in a 72 point (one inch) zone. A label is +similar to a hanging paragraph, except that the first line is aligned with +the indented portion and the label is separated by a gutter of 1 em space. +The skip between labels is one blank line. To begin a new paragraph at the +same indentation as the previous label, enter "\label{}" with no entry in +the parameter field of the \label. + + ã|Example:ã% +origin of rock provides clues. +\label{Sedimentary} rock is recemented from + +particles of older rock that has been broken down +by physical and chemical weathering. +\label{Metamorphic} +rock is igneous or sedimentary that has been +altered by temperature and pressure. +\la{} +Human cells act in a manner like sedimentary rock. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| origin of rock provides clues. | +| Sedimentaryrock is recemented from particles of older rock that has been | +| broken down by physical and chemical weathering. | +| | +| Metamorphicrock is igneous or sedimentary that has been altered by | +| temperature and pressure. | +| Human cells act in a manner like sedimentary rock. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The label indent and the gutter width can be modified with the \labelformat +markup diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..362b463298 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|LABELã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\labelformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..748b10c7c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| labelformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\labelformat{\skipbefore{1\bl} + \labelwidth{72pt} + \gutter{1em} + \everylabel{\rm} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\lafã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \labelwidth, \gutter, +\everylabelã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \labelformat markup controls the appearance of labelled paragraphs. + +\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a +block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. + +\labelwidth sets the amount of space to contain the label to the left of +the paragraph. The shaded portion illustrated here is the "label width" +area: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| SCALE, | +| nmin, nmax fornhalfwordxdata.)nteSince pixeledifferences5can(rangeabetween | +| -255 and +255 (-511 and . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The default label width is 72 points (one inch). To change to a label width +of 1 2 inch you would enter, + +\labelformat{\labelwidth{.5in}} + +\gutter keeps a small amount of space between the label and the paragraph. +The shaded portion illustrated on the next page is the "label gutter" area. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| SCALE, | +| nmin, nmax fornhalfwordxdata.)nteSince pixeledifferences5can(rangeabetween | +| -255 and +255 (-511 and . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The default amount is 1 em space. To change to a label gutter of 5 points +you would enter, + +\labelformat{\gutter{5pt}} + +\everylabel determines the type face and size of the label itself. The +default is roman face and right ragged. + + ã|Example:ã% +The sample markup reduces the skipbefore amount, increases the labelwidth +(to suit a larger format), and changes the font for labels to 9 point bold. +Note the use of displayed math mode. + +\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default} +\labelformat{\skipbefore{6pt} + \labelwidth{108pt} + \gutter{1em} + \everylabel{\ninepoint\bd}} +\label{HALF} +specifies that both input datasets are halfword +(maximum 511 DN) (default is byte data). +\la{ADD} specifies that the sum of the two input +datasets is to be computed (default is the +computation of the difference image). + +\la{SCALE, nmin, nmax} +nmin and nmax are integers between -255 and 510 +(-511 and 1022 for halfword data.) Since . . . +\la{} +If N(I,J) is less than nmin, the OUTPUT=0.\lbr +If N(I,J) is greater than nmax, the OUTPUT=K.\lbr +If N(I,J) is between or equal to nmin and nmax then +@@OUTPUT = K*{N(I,J)-nmin\over nmax-nmin}@@ +where N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) - IN2(I,J) or if "ADD" has +been specified, N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) + IN2(I,J) +and K = 255 (511 for halfword data). +\la{TRANS\lbr sl1, ss1, sl2, ss2}sl1 and ss1 are +line and sample +coordinates for a point in IN1, and sl2 and ss2 are the +corresponding coordinates for the point in IN2. If HALF +has been specified, ss1 and ss2 refer to {\it bytes} +(not sample) in IN1 and In2, respectively. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| HALF specifies that both input datasets are halfword (maximum | +| 511 DN) (default is byte data). | +| ADD specifies that the sum of the two input datasets is to | +| be computed (default is the computation of the difference | +| image). | +| | +| SCALE, nmin, | +| nmax 1022 for halfword data.)rsSincewe.n.-.55 and 510 (-511 and | +| If N(I,J) is less than nmin, the OUTPUT=0. | +| If N(I,J) is greater than nmax, the OUTPUT=K. | +| If N(I,J) is between or equal to nmin and nmax then | +| OUTPUT = K*N(I,J)-nmin nmax-nmin where N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) - | +| IN2(I,J) or if "ADD" has been specified, N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) | +| + IN2(I,J) and K = 255 (511 for halfword data). | +| | +| TRANS | +| sl1, ss1, sl2,IN1, and sl2 and ss2 are the corresponding coordinates for | +| ss2 the pointsinaIN2.inIfaHALFahasebeenrspecified,rss1pandtss2 | +| refer to bytes (not sample) in IN1 and In2, respectively. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4982e67f9c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| linebreak | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\lbrã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \linebreak markup causes a line to finish without interrupting a +paragraph. Occasionally it is necessary to break a line in a precise place +within a paragraph, as opposed to letting TEXT1 decide where to break the +line. This markup does not end a paragraph, it simply starts the following +text of the paragraph on a new line instead of concatenating it to the end +of the previous line. + + ã|Example:ã% +This article is an outline of the codification of +Sociogeology into a branch of evolutionary geology. +The subject has an aggregate of self-sufficient + +concepts that with such disciplines as cosmetology +and astrology. Figure 1 shows a +schema borrowed from my previous book,\linebreak +{\it The Intact Societies: Vestals and Volcanoes},\lbr +which suggests how the amalgam can be achieved. +Geologists have always been intrigued by comparisons +between societies of rocks and those of vertebrates, +between two kingdoms. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| This article is an outline of the codification of Sociogeology into | +| a branch of evolutionary geology. The subject has an aggregate of | +| self-sufficient concepts that with such disciplines as cosmetology and | +| astrology. Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous book, | +| The Intact Societies: Vestals and Volcanoes, | +| which suggests how the amalgam can be achieved. Geologists have always | +| been intrigued by comparisons between societies of rocks and those of | +| vertebrates, between two kingdoms. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +See \break for the difference between these two markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e34179520b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| leader | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \leader markup is most often used in the \tableofcontentsformat in +conjunction with a page number. It produces dot leadering. You can also +use \leader in an \halign. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example using leaders also illustrates the use of \indent in \halign. + +The average annual costs of owning buildings in terms of +{\it taxes, insurance, maintenance,} and +{\it depreciation} are: +\halign{\indent\indent\hbox to 13pc {#\leader}& + \rt{#}\ \%\cr + +Taxes&1.00\cr +Insurance&.75\cr +Maintenance repairs&2.00\cr +Depreciation&4.00\cr +Miscellaneous&.25\cr +\indent\bd Total&8.00\cr} + +Will print: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The average annual costs of owning buildings in terms of taxes, | +| insurance, maintenance, and depreciation are: | +| Taxes . .... .. .....1.00 % | +| Insurance ... . ... ..75 % | +| Maintenance repairs . 2.00 % | +| Depreciation. . . ... 4.00 % | +| Miscellaneous. . .... .25 % | +| Total ... . ... 8.00 % | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Notice in the last line the the ampersand (&) acted as a font delimiter for +the \bd which printed "Total". diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..754e174b0c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|LETTERã%model is a general letter model. It is a template. You may modify +it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..251f2203c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| listbegin | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\libã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \listbegin markup starts a series of items set off with numbers, +letters, or bullets (raised dots). The \listbegin markup ends the previous +paragraph. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Some nations have historically dominated others. +\par +\listbegin +\bul United States in Latin America (and the Pacific) +\bul Europe in Africa (especially England, France, + +Germany, the Netherlands---perhaps Portugal and Spain) +\bul Japan in Southeast Asia (earlier in China, now +in the Philippines, Borneo, and others) +\bul Russia in Eastern Europe (and attempts in South +America and the Caribbean) +\bul China in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast +Asia---Campuchea, and Vietnam) +\listend +\noindent +Countries have tried to dominate each other . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Some nations have historically dominated others. | +| * United States in Latin America (and the Pacific) | +| * Europe in Africa (especially England, France, Germany, the | +| Netherlands---perhaps Portugal and Spain) | +| * Japan in Southeast Asia (earlier in China, now in the Philippines, | +| Borneo, and others) | +| * Russia in Eastern Europe (and attempts in South America and the | +| Caribbean) | +| * China in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast Asia---Campuchea, and | +| Vietnam) | +| Countries have tried to dominate each other . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3bc295573f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| listend | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\lieã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \listend markup finishes a series of items set off with numbers, +letters, or bullets (raised dots). The \listend returns text to paragraph +mode. + + ã|Example:ã% +Reasons for this continued behavior include: +\par +\listbegin +\lil1 armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons +and troop carriers, and personnel vehicles) +\lil1 military forces (the troops and support personnel + +necessary to impose policy by force) +\listend +\noindent +The cultures of industrial nations are based on . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Reasons for this continued behavior include: | +| 1. armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons and troop carriers, | +| and personnel vehicles) | +| 2. military forces (the troops and support personnel necessary to impose | +| policy by force) | +| The cultures of industrial nations are based on . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ed5b99e21a --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| listformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\listformat{\skipbefore{0\bl} + \liststyle{1.,a.,i.,1),a),i),(1)} + \everylistlevel1{\rm\lin{36pt}\gutter{1em}} + \everylistlevel2{\rm\lin{58pt}\gutter{1em}} + \everylistlevel3{\rm\lin{79pt}\gutter{1em}} + \everylistlevel4{\rm\lin{101pt}\gutter{1em}} + \everylistlevel5{\rm\lin{122pt}\gutter{1em}} + \everylistlevel6{\rm\lin{144pt}\gutter{1em}} + \everylistlevel7{\rm\lin{166pt}\gutter{1em}} + \everybullet{\rm\lin{+36pt}\gutter{1em}} + \skipafter{0\bl}} + +Abbreviation: ã|\lifã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everylistleveln, \everybullet, +\skipafter, \liststyleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \listformat markup permits changes to the TEXT1 ordered list style, list +indentation, or other formatting of an outline list. + +ã|\skipbeforeã% indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a +list. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. + +ã|\liststyleã% sets the order of identifiers for the seven levels of a list. +Up to seven list styles may be entered in the \liststyle markup, each +separated by commas. The complete collection of possible list level styles +is: + + "1.", "a.", "A.", "i.", "I.", "1)", "a)", "A)", "i)", "I)", + "(1)", "(a)", "(A)", "(i)", "(I)", "1]", "a]", "A]", "i]", "I]", + "[1]", "[a]", "[A]", "[i]", "[I]" + + ã|Example:ã% +Note that every listlevel does not have to be changed or entered. + +\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt} + \liststyle{1.,a),(1)}} + +If your terminal does not have square brackets, you can use the \leftsquare- +bracket and \rightsquarebracket markup within the \liststyle markup. For +example: + + \liststyle{\lsb1.\rsb, a.} + +ã|\everylistleveln{Nested Markup}ã% The "n" indicates the list level number, +from 1 to 7. Each of the seven list levels has its own \everylistlevel +markup. The default indentation increases for each level down. You may use +Nested Markup such as font changes, \leftindent, \rightindent, and \gutter. + + * \leftindent is the distance from the left margin to the start of the +text of the item. The left indent is the shaded portion illustrated below: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| a. The "computer on a chip" has made it possible to extend automation | +| to the office place. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + * \gutter is the distance between the list level indicator and the text of +the item. The gutter is the shaded portion illustrated below: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| a. The "computer on a chip" has made it possible to extend automation | +| to the office place. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|\everybullet{Nested Markup}ã% Bullets can be used by themselves in a list +or after any level. If you wanted to change this default to have a right +ragged bullet with 36-point left and right indents, you would specify: + +\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt} + \everybullet{\rightragged\lin{36pt}\rin{36pt}} + \skipafter{0pt}} + +ã|\skipafterã% indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a list. +This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. + + ã|Example:ã% +Assuming you wanted the text to be right justified and double spaced in a 10 +point Computer Modern font and the list levels to be right ragged and single +spaced in a 9 point Computer Modern font, the \listformat could be entered +as illustrated on the next page. + +\sfs{cm9}{ninept}{default} + +\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt} + \liststyle{1.,a.,i.,1),a),i),(1)} + \everylistlevel1{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{24pt}} + \everylistlevel2{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{.8in}} + \everylistlevel3{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.1in}} + \everylistlevel4{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.4in}} + \everylistlevel5{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.7in}} + \everylistlevel6{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{2.0in}} + \everylistlevel7{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{2.3in}} + \skipafter{0pt}} + +. . . bridge specifications: | +\lib\lil1 Falsework under all spans shall be completely +released before forms are constructed and concrete is +placed in rail bases and traffic and pedestrian barriers. +\lil1 In order to determine the condition of column concrete, +forms shall always be removed from columns before releasing +supports from beneath beams and girders. +\lie + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| . . . bridge specifications: | +| 1. Falsework under all spans shall be completely released before forms | +| are constructed and concrete is placed in rail bases and traffic and | +| pedestrian barriers. | +| 2. In order to determine the condition of column concrete, forms shall | +| always be removed from columns before releasing supports from beneath | +| beams and girders. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..101297f484 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| listlevel | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\lilnã% + +Parameters: ã|n, 1 to 7ã% + + ã|Description:ã% +TEXT1 provides seven levels of list enumeration. The levels in a list are +each designated with a \listlevel markup; each level is differentiated with +a list level number n, 1 to 7. To specify an outline list, start with the +\listbegin markup followed by \listlevel, and ending with a \listend. Each +\listlevel will indent an absolute amount from the left margin. The default +indentation for level 1 is 36 points ( 1/2 inch); level 2 is 58 points; and +each level increases. + + ã|Example:ã% +\lib +\lil1 Humans vs. rocks. + +\lil2 Rocks are food source for humans. +\lil3 Igneous +\lil3 Metamorphic +\lil2 Humans are food source for rocks. +\lil1 Rocks vs. humans. +\lie +\nin Only more research can dig up facts for solving . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. Humans vs. rocks. | +| a. Rocks are food source for humans. | +| i. Igneous | +| ii. Metamorphic | +| b. Humans are food source for rocks. | +| 2. Rocks vs. humans. | +| Only more research can dig up facts for solving . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Each \listlevel must have a beginning \listbegin and an ending \listend. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..df27e80960 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| leftindent | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\linã% + +Parameters: ã|unit of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \lin markup indents text from the left margin. The value may be +relative, e.g., {+.5in}, which adds (or subtracts) the amount from the +current left margin or current indent (if one is in effect). The default +for left indent is zero. The indentation remains until another \leftindent +overrides it. This markup causes a break in text. + + ã|Example:ã% +from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, +because of the inevitability of entropic direction. +\vs{9pt} +\leftindent{+1in} + +What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can +minerals influence human social behavior, any more +than gravity? This theory is 'on the rocks.' +\par +\leftindent{-1in} +\rightline{Clay Gneiss} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, because of the | +| inevitability of entropic direction. | +| What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can minerals | +| influence human social behavior, any more than gravity? This | +| theory is 'on the rocks.' | +| Clay Gneiss | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +You can also use grouping to limit the effects of the \leftindent. If you +do, be sure that the last paragraph to be indented is followed by a \par. +The above illustration could also have been accomplished with grouping as +illustrated on the next page. + +from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, +because of the inevitability of entropic direction. +\vs{9pt} +{\leftindent{+1in} +What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can +minerals influence human social behavior, any more +than gravity? This theory is 'on the rocks.' +\par +} +\rightline{Clay Gneiss} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, because of the | +| inevitability of entropic direction. | +| | +| What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can minerals | +| influence human social behavior, any more than gravity? This | +| theory is 'on the rocks.' | +| Clay Gneiss | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e10d568d60 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| line | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \line markup is used most often in the \runningheadformat and \running- +footformat running title markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted to left justify "Chapter 1" and right justify "page 2" (where +"2" is actually the page number, \pagenumber), enter: + +\rhf{\bothpages{ + \line{\lft{Chapter 1}\rt{page \pagenumber}}}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter 1 page 1 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +A construct such as, + +\rhf{\bothpages{ + \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today} + \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}} + +will not print the date centered on the page: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| page 2 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with +\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the +date: + +\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn} + \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}} + \vs{-\bl} + \line{\ctr{\today}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| page 3 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1394439251 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| lineinterval | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\lintã% + +Parameters: ã|intervalã% + + ã|Description:ã% +When \printingnumbers{yes} and \countinglines{yes} have both been specified, +this markup is used to specify when a line number is to be printed for line +numbering in the margin of a document. It need only be specified once at +the top of a document. The default is every fifth line counted will be +numbered. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted every tenth line counted to be numbered, you would specify: + +\lineinterval{10} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is +ignored for all other printers. + You may specify an interval from 0-255. Practically speaking, you +should specify an interval from 1-150. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a872714bb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| listresume | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\lirã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +\listresume is used to end a lower listlevel and return to the next higher +listlevel without starting a new point. + + ã|Example:ã% +\lib +\lil1 All fixed time controllers shall be equipped with +indicating switches and wiring to provide local control +of the following functions: +\lil2 Transfer from automatic to manual operation, +\lil2 Transfer from normal operation to flashing, +\listresume + +Combined master and intersection controllers shall have +indicating switches for functions (b) and (c), above, +for interconnected system. +\par +Combined master and intersection controllers shall also +have provisions for time switch control. +\lil1 All fixed-time controllers shall be . . . +\listend + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. All fixed time controllers shall be equipped with indicating switches | +| and wiring to provide local control of the following functions: | +| a. Transfer from automatic to manual operation, | +| b. Transfer from normal operation to flashing, | +| Combined master and intersection controllers shall have indicating | +| switches for functions (b) and (c), above, for interconnected system. | +| Combined master and intersection controllers shall also have | +| provisions for time switch control. | +| 2. All fixed-time controllers shall be . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9c6016c1d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|LISTSã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\listformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..26007a09dd --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| linenumberfont | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\lnfã% + +Parameters: ã|fontã% + + ã|Description:ã% +When \printingnumbers{yes} and \countinglines{yes} have both been specified, +this markup is used to specify what font the line number is to be printed in +the margin of a document. It need only be specified once at the top of a +document. The default is font "etsc 8", which is English Times Small Caps +at 8 point. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted to use Plantin Roman, you would specify: + +\linenumberfont{plr 10} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is +ignored for all other printers. + See the Font Catalog to determine what fonts to use. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bab03a2243 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| leftragged | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\lrã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \leftragged markup leaves the left margin uneven after formatting. This +markup is used only with unusual text, for instance, introductory quotes for +chapters. + + ã|Example:ã% +\leftragged +The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate +oversimplification comes complex obfuscation and general +theoretification. +Behavioral research will lead in this direction, as the + +general theory of Sociogeology predicts the features of +social organization from knowledge of population +parameters and behavioral constraints imposed by +the mineral constitution of the species. +\par +Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high +temperatures, fever, for instance. +Metamorphic crystallization involves low temperatures; +\justify + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Thecomparison mayseemfacile, butfrom deliberateoversimplificationcomes | +| complex obfuscationandgeneral theoretification.Behavioral researchwilllead | +| inthis direction,asthe generaltheoryof Sociogeologypredicts thefeaturesof | +| social organizationfromknowledge ofpopulation parametersandbehavioral | +| constraints imposedbythe mineralconstitution ofthespecies. | +| Humansexhibit metamorphicbehaviorover timeor athightemperatures, | +| fever,forinstance. Metamorphiccrystallization involveslowtemperatures; | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Use \justify to turn the justification back on again. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..29c37a2849 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| Summary of TEXT1 Markup | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + Help may be selected for the following markup by placing the cursor +under any of the first eight characters of the desired markup abbreviation +followed bypressing the PF1 key. + +Abbreviation Markup Name Function + +app \appendix{} designate appendix +apf \appendixformat{} modify appendix style +aib \asisbegin start 'as is' text +aie \asisend end 'as is' text +aif \asisformat{} modify 'as is' style +aen \autoendnote{} save endnote +afn \autofootnote{} add footnote +bie \bibentry start entry +bib \bibliography{} designate bibliography +bif \bibliographyformat{} modify bibliography style +bqb \blockquotebegin start block quote +bqe \blockquoteend end block quote +bqf \blockquoteformat{} modify block quote style +bd \bold call bold font +bi \bolditalic call bolditalic font +break \break force line and page breaks +bul \bullet start bullet +cc \caps call caps/small caps font +cl \centerline{} center one line +clb \centerlinesbegin begin centering, 'as is' +cle \centerlinesend end centering +cents \cents cent sign +chap \chapter{} designate chapter +chf \chapterformat{} modify chapter style +coul \countinglines{} start counting lines +dsp \doublespace start alternate blank lines +db \drawbox{} draw a box around text +dbrs \drawboxrulesize{} thickness of a box's rule +dbm \drawboxmat{} white space around a box +die \dumpinsertseject dump and print inserts +el \ellipsis{} 3 or 4 dot ellipsis +ep \emptypage print an empty page +enf \endnoteformat{} modify endnote style +epm \evenpagemargin used in line numbering +ex \extension call the extension font +fig \figure{}{} create a figure +fif \figureformat{} modify figures +fixf \fixedformat multiple column format style +font \font font definition +footnote \footnote{}{} add footnote +fnf \footnoteformat{} modify footnote style +frac \fraction print a fraction +frenchspacing \frenchspacing spacing for bibliographies +goodbreak \goodbreak indicate likely page break +halign \halign table building +hin \hangingindent set hanging paragraph indent +hp \hangingparagraph start hanging paragraph +hbox \hbox TEX horizontal box +hs \horizontalspace{} add horizontal space +hrule \hrule draw a horizontal rule +hsize \hsize set the galleywidth +hof \hyphenoff turn off hyphenation +hon \hyphenon turn on hyphenation +incl \include add an external graphic +indent \indent add horizontal space +ix \index add item to index +ixf \indexformat specify the index format +input \input input another file +isk \interlineskip{} set interline skip +it \italic specify italic font +item \item unordered lists +ju \justify align margins +la \label start a label +laf \labelformat modify label style +leader \leader dot leadering +lin \leftindent{} indent left margin +lr \leftragged unaligned left margin +line \line left justify a line +lbr \linebreak cause unfilled line break +lint \lineinterval line numbering +lnf \linenumberfont line numbering +lib \listbegin start list +lie \listend end list +lif \listformat{} modify list style +lil \listlevel{} start new list level (1-7) +lir \listresume resume at previous list level +mn \marginnote print a note in the margin +mnf \marginnoteformat modify margin note style +mathdefault \mathdefault establish math fonts +mi \mathitalic call math italic font +msp \monospace typewriter printer setup +mcf \multicolumnformat modify multiple column defaults +nc \newcolumn start a new column +np \newpage start a new page +nobreak \nobreak discourage page break +nin \noindent suppress paragraph indent +nonfrenchspacing \nonfrenchspacing turn off french spacing +ntp \notitlepage suppress title page +numl \numberinglines line numbering +opm \oddpagemargin line numbering +oc \onecolumn one column formatting +pf \pageformat page size and margins +pn \pagenumber print page number +par \paragraph end paragraph +pb \paragraphbox box a paragraph +pin \paragraphindent{} set paragraph indentation +printind \printindex print the document index +psk \paragraphskip{} set space between paragraphs +part \part{} designate major heading +paf \partformat{} modify part style +plaintexmathon \plaintexmathon use PLAIN.TEX's $ +ppl \poplevel line numbering +pre \preface{} designate preliminary pages +prf \prefaceformat{} modify preface style +pen \printendnotes print accumulated endnotes +prin \printingnumbers{} line numbering +pic \putincontents1{} add to the table of contents +quad \quad add an 'em' of space +qquad \qquad add two 'em's of space +raggedbottom \raggedbottom don't align page bottoms +rin \rightindent{} indent right margin +rl \rightline{} right justify line +rlb \rightlinesbegin begin right alignment, 'as is' +rle \rightlinesend end right alignment, 'as is' +rr \rightragged unaligned right margin +rm \roman specify roman font +rule \rule create horizontal line +rff \runningfootformat{} specify running foot format +rhf \runningheadformat{} specify running head format +sau \sameauthor previous author, bibliography +sfs \selectfontset{}{}{} specify font set +sms \selectmathset{}{} specify math set +ssf \selectspecificfont{}{}{} specify specific font +san \setappendixnumber{} reset appendix number +scn \setchapternumber{} reset chapter number +senn \setendnotenumber{} reset endnote number +sfn \setfigurenumber{} reset figure number +sffn \setfootnotenumber{} reset footnote number +spn \setpagenumber{} reset page number +sptn \setpartnumber{} reset part number +ssan \setsubheadanumber{} reset subheada number +ssbn \setsubheadbnumber{} reset subheadb number +sscn \setsubheadcnumber{} reset subheadc number +ssdn \setsubheaddnumber{} reset subheadd number +stn \settablenumber{} reset table number +settabs \settabs tables +ssp \singlespace start single spacing +strut \strut tables +sha \subheada{} designate first subheading +shaf \subheadaformat{} modify first subheading style +shb \subheadb{} designate second subheading +shbf \subheadbformat{} modify second subheading style +shc \subheadc{} designate third subheading +shcf \subheadcformat{} modify third subheading style +shd \subheadd{} designate fourth subheading +shdf \subheaddformat{} modify fourth subheading style +sy \symbol call the symbol font +taf \tableformat{} modify table title style +toc \tableofcontents{} print table of contents +tocf \tableofcontentsformat{} modify table of contents style +tat \tabletitle{} print a table title +tenpt \tenpt call 10pt font set +text1 \text1 print "TEXT1" +thc \threecolumns print text in 3 columns +tp \titlepage designate title page +tpf \titlepageformat{} modify title page style +toclbr \toclinebreak cause a line break in the contents +today \today print current date +twelvept \twelvept call 12pt font set +twc \twocolumns print text in 2 columns +tt \typewriter call typewriter font +us \underscore{} underline word(s) +vbox \vbox TEX vertical box +vs \verticalspace{} leave vertical space +vsk \verticalspacekeep{} leave vertical space +vrule \vrule draw a vertical rule diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..13e28e3ece --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|MARNOTEã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\marginnoteformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9fe869f6a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| mathdefault | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By default, TEXT1 establishes a 9 point font for math mode superscripts, +and a 7 point font for math mode supersuperscripts. This is the value of +\mathdefault. You can establish other math mode font combinations than 9/7 +by using the \selectmathset markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +You can establish a larger math set called \bigmath which can be used for +display math and you can switch back to \mathdefault for the text math. + +\selectmathset{cm1412m}{bigmath} +\twelvept +\mathdefault + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f24f22ac48 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| multicolumnformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\multicolumnformat{ + \twocolumnwidth{.48\galleywidth} + \threecolumnwidth{.31\galleywidth} + \twocolumngutter{.04\galleywidth} + \threecolumngutter{.035\galleywidth} + \columnrulewidth{0.0pt} + \skipbefore{6pt plus3pt minus2pt} + \skipafter{6pt plus3pt minus2pt} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\mcfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\twocolumnwidth, \threecolumnwidth, +\twocolumngutter, \threecolumngutter, \columnrulewidth, +\skipbefore, \skipafterã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The column and gutter widths can be changed by modifying the +\multicolumnformat markup. Column widths are specified in a percentage +of the \galleywidth, the width of the text area on the page as specified +in the \pageformat markup. If the default "flexibleformat" is being used +a skip before and a skip after the multiple column format may also be +specified. These skips are ignored if you are using \fixedformat. + +ã|\twocolumnwidthã% is the width of each column when you specify \twocolumns. +Each column will be exactly the same width. This width is the shaded area +illustrated below: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Greek man- from the fourth | +| uscripts of the to the ninth | +| Bible fall into centuries, be- | +| 3 groups (1) Pa- ginning with the | +| pyri, covering Codex Vaticanus | +| the period from and the Codex | +| the third cen- Sinaiticus; (3) | +| tury b.c. to Vellum minis- | +| the fourth cen- cules, from the | +| tury a.d. (2) ninth century | +| Vellum uncials-- to the inven- | +| -a form of ma- tion of print- | +| juscule (large ing, there are | +| letter)--- well over 4,000 | +| of various dates manuscripts. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|\threecolumnwidthã% is the width of each column when you specify +\threecolumns. Each column will be exactly the same width. This +width is the shaded area illustrated below: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Greek manu- (2) Vellum icanus and | +| scripts of uncials- the Codex | +| the Bible --a form Sinaiticus; | +| fall into of majus- (3) Vel- | +| 3 groups: cule (large lum minis- | +| (1) Papyri, letter)-- cules, from | +| covering -of various the ninth | +| the period dates from century to | +| from the the fourth the inven- | +| third cen- to the tion | +| tury b.c. ninth cen- of print- | +| to the turies, be- ing, there | +| fourth cen- ginning are over | +| tury a.d. with the 4,000 manu- | +| Codex Vat- scripts. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|\twocolumngutterã% is the distance between each column when you specify +\twocolumns. The gutter is the shaded area illustrated below: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Greek man- from the fourth | +| uscripts of the to the ninth | +| Bible fall into centuries, be- | +| 3 groups (1) Pa- ginning with the | +| pyri, covering Codex Vaticanus | +| the period from and the Codex | +| the third cen- Sinaiticus; (3) | +| tury b.c. to Vellum minis- | +| the fourth cen- cules, from the | +| tury a.d. (2) ninth century | +| Vellum uncials-- to the inven- | +| -a form of ma- tion of print- | +| juscule (large ing, there are | +| letter)--- well over 4,000 | +| of various dates manuscripts. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|\threecolumngutterã% is the distance between each column when you specify +\threecolumns. Each gutter will be exactly the same width. The gutter is +the shaded area illustrated on the next page: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Greek manu- (2) Vellum icanus and | +| scripts of uncials- the Codex | +| the Bible --a form Sinaiticus; | +| fall into of majus- (3) Vel- | +| 3 groups: cule (large lum minis- | +| (1) Papyri, letter)-- cules, from | +| covering -of various the ninth | +| the period dates from century to | +| from the the fourth the inven- | +| third cen- to the tion | +| tury b.c. ninth cen- of print- | +| to the turies, be- ing, there | +| fourth cen- ginning are over | +| tury a.d. with the 4,000 manu- | +| Codex Vat- scripts. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|\columnrulewidthã% when set to a non zero value will print a rule between +each column. + +ã|\skipbeforeã% is the distance between the one column text and the multiple +column text when you are using the flexible method of setting multiple +columns. The skip is ignored if you are using \fixedformat. + +ã|\skipafterã% is the distance between the multiple column text and the one +column text when you are using the flexible method of setting multiple +columns. The skip is ignored if you are using \fixedformat. + + ã|Example:ã% +You can also specify the column widths in units of measure, instead of a +percentage of the \galleywidth. + + \multicolumnformat{ + \twocolumnwidth{10pc} + \twocolumngutter{3pc} + \columnrulewidth{.25pt} + + \skipbefore{6pt plus3pt minus2pt} + \skipafter{6pt plus3pt minus2pt}} + + \twocolumns + Greek manuscripts of the Bible fall into 3 groups + (1) {\it Papyri}, covering the period from the third century + {\caps b.c} to the fourth century {\caps a.d}. + (2) {\it Vellum uncials}---a form of majuscule (large + letter)---of various dates from the fourth to the ninth + centuries, beginning with the {\it Codex Vaticanus} and + the {\it Codex Sinaiticus}; + (3) {\it Vellum miniscules}, from the ninth century to + the invention of printing, there are well over + 4,000 manuscripts. + \onecolumn + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Greek manu- . from the fourth | +| scripts of the . to the ninth | +| Bible fall into . centuries, be- | +| 3 groups (1) Pa- . ginning with the | +| pyri, covering . Codex Vaticanus | +| the period from . and the Codex | +| the third cen- . Sinaiticus; (3) | +| tury b.c. to . Vellum minis- | +| the fourth cen- . cules, from the | +| tury a.d. (2) . ninth century | +| Vellum uncials-- . to the inven- | +| -a form of ma- . tion of print- | +| juscule (large . ing, there are | +| letter)--- . well over 4,000 | +| of various dates . manuscripts. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +The rule between the columns will not print as long as the column rule width +is zero. + The skip before and skip after are ignored in the optional fixed column +method. The fixed column format (\fixedformat) always fills the remainder +of the current page with white space and changes to the new format on the +following page. Columns may not be balanced in \fixedformat. + The \newcolumn markup while in the flexible format estimates the +remaining space on the page at the time it is entered. If a footnote +or other insert is placed on the same page after the newcolumn markup the +length of the blank column cannot be estimated properly. In this case, +TEXT1 will issue a warning, + +overfull \vbox 12pt while \output active + +You can compensate for the footnote or insert by subtracting twice the +amount of the overfull box in two columns or three times this amount in +triple columns immediately before the newcolumn markup. For example, if the +box is overfull by 12 points and you are in two columns, enter, + +\advance\vsize by-24pt +\newcolumn +text + +or in three columns before a \newcolumn enter, + +\advance\vsize by-36pt +\newcolumn +text + +This reduces the height of the current page enough to allow space for the +insert. The height of each column must be reduced by the amount of the +overfull box warning, or twice the amount for two columns and three times +the amount for three columns. See The TEXbook for more on \advance. + If the newcolumn markup appears on the final page of the document it +may cause the balance columns routine to fail because one column is the +full height of the page. Do not change to \fixedformat after entering +\newcolumn. + + Certain line breaking penalties have been altered in the multiple column +formats. These penalties, in combination or separately, may cause a short +column if there are not a sufficient number of places specified to add extra +space, "glue." + + Single Column Penalties +\brokenpenalty=100 \clubpenalty=150 +\exhyphenpenalty=50 \hyphenpenalty=50 +\widowpenalty=150 \hbadness=1000 +\tolerance=200 + Two Columns Penalties +\brokenpenalty=0 \clubpenalty=0 +\exhyphenpenalty=0 \hyphenpenalty=0 +\widowpenalty=0 \hbadness=6400 +\tolerance=6400 + Three Columns Penalties +\brokenpenalty=0 \clubpenalty=0 +\exhyphenpenalty=0 \hyphenpenalty=0 +\widowpenalty=0 \hbadness=9600 +\tolerance=9600 + +The penalties may be reinstated in the multiple column formats by entering +each markup with a new value in the text stream immediately after the first +call for the double or triple column markup. Refer to The TEXbook for a +discussion of the above penalties. + When formatting multiple column text and other large formatting tasks, +the user may run into trouble by calling for so many format changes that +the available memory space is overrun. If this happens reduce the number +of markup used on the page that fails to format. The numbers enclosed in +angle brackets < 1 > < 2 > < 3 > show how many pages have been completed and +are printed on the terminal screen as each page is completed. If the macro +memory was exceeded when < 3 > was the last number in the sequence you would +know that the memory was exceeded while formatting page four. Your file +will not print with this error condition. + To find the point in your document that exceeded the memory use the +markup \bye at different places in your file. This markup stops text +processing. At the point \bye doesn't prevent the error condition you know +that you have passed page 4 where the error occurred. You may then examine +the markup before the \bye for possible elimination or find other markup +that will format properly without overrunning the memory. See The TEXbook +for more on \bye. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e6362b8139 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|MEMOã%model is a general memo model. It is a template. You may modify it, +but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4e38e59993 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| mathitalic | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\miã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \mathitalic markup is a font change much the same as \roman or +\italic. The behavior of the math italic font is quite different from the +italic. For example, the sequence "This lengthy succession" will print +as "This lengthy succession" with \italic and "This lengthy succession with +\mathitalic. This markup is usually used in math mode. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Control sequences with {\it several +arguments} require even more {\mi precautions +than control sequences with one argument.} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Control sequences with several arguments require even more precautions | +| than control sequences with one argument. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +\mathitalic does not honor interword spacing (the space between words) in a +sentence. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..238c713a5d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| marginnote | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\mnã% + +Parameters: ã|note textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Margin notes can be added to either the left or right side of a page with +the \marginnote markup. As the name indicates, margin notes are outside the +defined margin. They are produced, by default, right ragged in a 10 point +Computer Modern font in the left margin with a width of 60 points and a +gutter of 12 points. + + ã|Example:ã% +. . . a General Systems Theory of geological change. | +\marginnote{IV.7.4} +No theory, however, has unified diverse sciences of . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| . . . a General Systems Theory of geological change. No theory, | +| however, has unified diverse sciences of . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Avoid using \marginnote with \monospace. + Refer to the description of the \marginnoteformat markup to find out how +to change the \marginnote defaults. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c6bc4061c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| marginnoteformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\marginnoteformat{\position{left} + \notewidth{54pt}} + \notegutter{6pt} + \everymarginnote{\tenpt\rr}} + +Abbreviation: ã|\mnfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\position, \notewidth, \notegutter, +\everymarginnoteã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The defaults for the \marginnote markup can be modified with +\marginnoteformat. + +ã|\positionã% by default places the margin note in the margin. You can have it +placed in the right margin by specifying: + +\marginnoteformat{right} + +ã|\notewidthã% is the width of the area in the margin used for printing the +margin note. + +ã|\notegutterã% is the width of the area between the margin note and the left +margin of the text. + +ã|\everymarginnote{Nested Markup}ã% can be vertical mode markup such as \right- +ragged, \leftragged, \justify, and font changes. + + ã|Example:ã% +Change the margin notes so they print in the right margin in a 7 point font +with a margin note width of 46 points. + +\sfs{cm7}{sevenpt}{default} +\marginnoteformat{\position{right} + \notewidth{46pt}} + \notegutter{1em} + \everymarginnote{\sevenpt\rm} } + +This chapter explains the fundamental steps in preparing +a file containing ordinary English text. Numerous +exercises have been interspersed throughout the +\marginnote{Well, there {\it will} be lots of exercises +eventually.} text, to clarify certain points, +or just to provide practice. + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..854d444579 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| monospace | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\mspã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Typestyles may be monospaced, where all letters are the same width, or +proportionally spaced, where letters are different widths. Typewriter +printers have only monospaced typestyles; Composing printers have both +styles available. The default typestyle for TEXT1 is Computer Modern, a +proportionally spaced typestyle for composing printers. It is not available +on typewriter printers. + The \monospace markup calls the monospaced font and adjusts many TEXT1 +block defaults to fit within the limitations of monospace. For example, +the amount of space before and after a block quote is increased to whole +baseline skips, instead of half (monospace only deals with whole lines). +References for footnotes are placed on the baseline instead of superscripted +(which is not available in monospace). + + If you specify \italic and you are using \monospace, you will get +underscores instead of italics, since most typewriter printers do not have +italics. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\monospace +As long as human institutions were large and brittle, +war was an effective way of disassembling them. +The intellectual rationalization for the continual +preparation for war is the old Roman adage: +{\it If you want peace, prepare for war.} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| As long as human institutions were large and brittle, war was an | +| effective way of disassembling them. The intellectual rationalization for | +| the continual preparation for war is the old Roman adage: If you want | +| peace, prepare for war. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Specify the \monospace markup only once. It should be the first markup in +your file. + The markup the \monospace modifies, and their new defaults are as +follows: + + * The font for the table of contents will print with \roman. + + * \raggedbottom is "on" instead of \normalbottom. + + * \paragraphskip is set to "0pt". + + * \paragraphindent is set to "36pt". + + * The \skipbefore and \skipafter for \asisformat is set to "1\bl" instead + of 6 points. + + * The \skipbefore and \skipafter for \blockquoteformat is set to "1\bl" + instead of 6 points; the text is indented 36 points instead of 24 + points; the text is printed in monospace roman instead of 10 point + Computer Modern roman. + + * Figure titles are printed monospace bold instead of 10 point Computer + Modern bold. + + * Table titles are printed in monospace bold instead of Computer Modern + 12 point bold. + + * Endnotes are printed with no extra space, except paragraph skip, + between notes instead of 4 points as is the non \monospace default; The + note is printed in monospace roman instead of Computer Modern 10 point; + The text of the note is not indented, instead of the default 1.2em + indentation. + + * Autofootnotes are printed down instead of superscripted; Their style is + "(1)" instead of "1" in monospace roman instead of Computer Modern 10 + point; At the bottom of the page the note carries a paragraph indent of + 20 points instead of .5in. + + * Heading markup, such as \part, \chapter, \subheada, etc. are printed + in monospace instead of Computer Modern 12 point. + + * The running head is defined to use monospace instead of Computer Modern + 12 point. + +If you want to change any of the defaults for the above mentioned markup, +they must come after the \monospace markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..88473bcd09 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|MULTICOLã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\multicolumnformat for 2 or 3 columns. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c8463b8ade --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| newcolumn | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ncã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +When using \twocolumns or \threecolumns, there may be times when an author +wants to force TEXT1 to break a column at a point other than at the bottom +of a page. This can be done by entering the \newcolumn markup. Any +column in the double or triple column formats can be broken by inserting the +\newcolumn (\nc) markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +This was accomplished by entering the \newcolumn markup between the desired +list entries while in \twocolumns + +\twocolumns +\hangingparagraph + +Ehrlich, P. et al. 1984. {\it Cold and the Dark}. +New York: W.~Norton. +\hangingparagraph +Osborn, E. 1962. (personal message). +\newcolumn +\hangingparagraph +Roszak, T. 1972. {\it Where the Wasteland Ends}. +New York: Harper & Row. ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Ehrlich, P. et Roszak, T. 1972. | +| al. 1984. Where | +| Cold and the the Wasteland | +| Dark. New Ends. New | +| York: York: Harper | +| W. Norton. & Row. | +| Osborn, E. 1962. | +| (personal | +| message). | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +This markup has the same effect as \newpage if you are in a printing in one +column instead of multiple columns. + If you are in multiple columns and you want to go to the next page, use +\newpage instead of \newcolumn. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..52e0ac3f16 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| noindent | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ninã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Paragraph indentation can be suspended for the following paragraph by +placing a \noindent markup at the beginning of the first line. A paragraph +following a block quote or following a title is often not indented. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\lib +\lil1 the economic advantages of large-scale operations +(as shown in industrial applications) +\listlevel2 armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, +weapons and troop carriers, and personnel vehicles) +\listlevel2 military forces (the troops and support + +personnel necessary to impose policy by force) +\listend +\noindent +The cultures of industrial nations are based on +accumulations of materials. +\par +Questions about defining . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. the economic advantages of large-scale operations (as shown in | +| industrial applications) | +| a. armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons and troop | +| carriers, and personnel vehicles) | +| b. military forces (the troops and support personnel necessary to | +| impose policy by force) | +| The cultures of industrial nations are based on accumulations of | +| materials. | +| Questions about defining . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..078a6418fc --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| nobreak | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +You can discourage TEXT1 from breaking a page at a certain point by using +\nobreak. It should be preceded either by a \verticalspace or a \paragraph. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example tells TEXT1 to keep the title "Leached Samples" on the same +page as "Table 6 gives . . . ". + +\cl{\bd Leached Samples} +\vs{\bl} +\nobreak +Table 6 gives the compositions of the leached +samples as reported by x-ray fluorescence analysis + +(XRF). Using silica content as an internal standard, +the relative amounts of each element removed can be +calculated. These too are shown in Table 6. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Leached Sample | +| | +| Table 6 gives the compositions of the leached samples as reported by | +| x-ray fluorescence analysis (XRF). Using silica content as an internal | +| standard, the relative amounts of each element removed can be calculated. | +| These too are shown in Table 6. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..73157c7f9f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| nonfrenchspacing | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By default, TEXT1 will double space after punctuation, unless the letter +prior to the punctuation is a capital letter. To make all interword spacing +the same, regardless of punctuation, you can enter the \frenchspacing +markup. This will turn off the extra spacing following punctuation for the +rest of a document or until TEXT1 sees a \nonfrenchspacing markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you had specified \nonfrenchspacing to turn off french spacing, + +\nonfrenchspacing +\bibentry + +Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes +in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical +Publications, International. + +it might print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | +| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Compare this to the same bibliography entry printed with \frenchspacing: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | +| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ee4040fd74 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| newpage | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\npã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \newpage markup stops formatting the current page, leaving the remainder +blank (footnotes or bottom titles will print as expected), and starts a new +page with the text following the markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +The following example would print "Bibliography" at the top of the next +page. + +The rock should be left at the bottom, because of +the inevitability of entropic direction. +\par + +\newpage +\centerline{\bd Bibliography} +\hp +Grabens, G. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes in +the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical +Publications International. +\hp +Illite, I. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's +Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601. + + ã|Notes:ã% +If you are in \twocolumns and you specify \newpage while in the first +column, the second column will be left blank. If you are in \threecolumns +and you specify \newpage while in the first column, the second and third +columns will be left blank. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7a6c62959f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| notitlepage | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ntpã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By default, you always get a title page as the first page of your document. +If you want running titles on the first page, put the \notitlepage markup at +the top of the source. Then the first line of the \runningheadformat will +be the first line to appear at the top of the first and subsequent pages. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\ctr{\today}}}} +\notitlepage +\rightlinesbegin +J.R. Bays + +P.O. Box 2021 CS +Pullman, WA 99163 +\rightlinesend +\vs{2\bl} +\centerline{\bd Nuclear Utopia} +\vs{2\bl} +Nuclear war is unthinkable. +Limited disarmament is unworkable. +Environmental degradation is unconscionable. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| January 13, 1987 | +| | +| J.R. Bays | +| P.O. Box 2021 CS | +| Pullman, WA 99163 | +| | +| | +| Nuclear Utopia | +| | +| | +| Nuclear war is unthinkable. Limited disarmament is unworkable. | +| Environmental degradation is unconscionable. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a71e31704a --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| numberinglines | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\numlã% + +Parameters: ã|statusã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup is used to start numbering lines for line numbering in the +margin of a document. Status is true or false. + + ã|Example:ã% +To start line numbering you enter + +\numberinglines{true} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is +ignored for all other printers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0b3e8cdf0b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| onecolumn | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ocã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +If you have specified \twocolumns or \threecolumns, single column text can +be formatted again by entering the \onecolumn markup. For example, if an +author wants to change from a single column to two columns he enters the +\twocolumns markup where the two column text begins and \onecolumn or \oc +markup where the single column text begins again. + + ã|Example:ã% +The \twocolumns markup places the bullets in two columns. And \onecolumn +returns text to a single column. + +\twocolumns\listbegin +\bul {\it Russia} in Eastern Europe (and in + +South America and the Caribbean) +\nc +\bul {\it China} in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast +Asia---Campuchea, and Vietnam) +\listend +\onecolumn +\noindent +Countries have tried to dominate each other +economically and militarily for thousands of years. +Reasons for this continued behavior include . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| * Russia in * China in Ti- | +| Eastern Eu- bet (and | +| rope (and in most lately | +| South Amer- in South- | +| ica and the east Asia--- | +| Caribbean) Campuchea, | +| and Vietnam) | +| | +| Countries have tried to dominate each other economically and militarily | +| for thousands of years. Reasons for this continued behavior include | +| . . . | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +\onecolumn has no effect if you are already in one column. + If you are in \fixedformat, \onecolumn will do a \newpage before +starting one column formatting. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..657fa0e915 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| oddpagemargin | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\opmã% + +Parameters: ã|measurementã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup is used to indicate where a document's line numbering is to be +printed on odd numbered pages. The default is 407.7 points from the left +edge of the paper on odd pages. + + ã|Example:ã% +To indicate that you want line numbering to start at 1 inch from the left +edge, you would enter at the beginning of your document: + +\oddpagemargin{1in} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is +ignored for all other printers. + Valid values for \oddpagemargin are 0 to 2 to the power of 32 points, +practical values are 5 to 860 points. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..851a5e290e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| partformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\partformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject\titlepage + \hrule height 0pt depth 0pt + \vfil + \centerline{\twelvept\bd + Part \partnumber} + \centerline{\twelvept\bd \parttitle} + \setchapternumber{0} + \setsubheadanumber{0} + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0} + \setfootnotenumber{0} + \setendnotenumber{0} + \setfigurenumber{0} + \settablenumber{0} + } + + \incontents{yes} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\pafã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \partformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the +appearance of the part title. Following are the submarkup descriptions. + +ã|numberingstyleã% allows you to change the style from Arabic numerals, the +default (1), to capital letters (A) or roman numerals (I). If you wanted +your parts in roman numerals, you would specify: + +\partformat{\numberingstyle{I}} + +ã|titleformatã% controls the appearance of the part title banner. You may +use markup such as \newpage, \dumpinsertseject \verticalspace, and \center- +line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within +or outside of \partformat: + ã|partnumber.ã% prints the most recent part number. + ã|parttitle.ã% prints the most recent part title. + ã|hrule height 0pt depth 0pt.ã% is used to create a half title page +along with \vfil. + +ã|incontentsã% places the part title in contents (if one is printed). +Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." + + ã|Example:ã% +This example does not create a half title page. Instead the part starts a +new page, centers the title bold, and one line is skipped afterwards before +printing the text of the part. + +\partformat{\titleformat{\newpage + \cl{\bd \parttitle} + + \vs{1\bl} + }} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \partformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are +used. See The TEXbook for more on \vfil. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9e08994304 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|PAGE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\pageformat, page dimensions and margins for this \monospace job. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7b17e6276d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|PAGE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\pageformat, page dimensions and margins for thisã|nonã%\monospace job. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..51c7b221ef --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|PAPERã%model is a general paper model. It is a template. You may modify +it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1a4a9c500f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| paragraph | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\parã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +A paragraph is a composition consisting of a group of sentences dealing with +a single topic. A paragraph is commonly indicated by beginning on a new +line and indenting the first line. + The TEXT1 program is paragraph-oriented, that is, it reads an entire +paragraph before breaking it into lines. Because TEXT1 reads by paragraphs, +the \paragraph markup comes at the end of a paragraph, instead of the +beginning. Thus, to end a paragraph, enter the \paragraph markup (or a +blank line) on the last line of text or on a line by itself, which makes it +easier to spot paragraphs in the source. + + ã|Example:ã% +This sample shows the relation of text to markup. + +\psk{5pt}\pin{10pt} +I raised it in order to characterize the +essence of Sociogeology. Will Durant recognized that +civilization existed by consent of geology---subject +to change without notice. +\paragraph +The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the +geological basis of all social behavior. +It explains human behavior by empirical description +of the attributes of mineral composition. +It is most successful when it provides detailed +description of particulate phenomena and first-order +correlations with features of the physical +environment. + +One of its primary functions is to reformulate the +shaky foundations of social sciences in a way that +draws them into a modern synthesis with the hard +sciences. + +\par +This article is an outline of the codification of +Sociogeology into a branch of evolutionary geology. +The subject has an aggregate of self-sufficient . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +| | +| I raised it in order to characterize the essence of Sociogeology. Will | +| Durant recognized that civilization existed by consent of geology--- | +| subject to change without notice. | +| The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the geological basis of | +| all social behavior. It explains human behavior by empirical description | +| of the attributes of mineral composition. It is most successful when | +| it provides detailed description of particulate phenomena and first-order | +| correlations with features of the physical environment. | +| | +| One of its primary functions is to reformulate the shaky foundations of | +| social sciences in a way that draws them into a modern synthesis with the | +| hard sciences. | +| This article is an outline of the codification of Sociogeology into | +| a branch of evolutionary geology. The subject has an aggregate of | +| self-sufficient . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +A blank line also ends a paragraph. For this reason, blank lines may be +used in place of \paragraph markup. + Paragraphs are not permitted in math mode; they cause errors. Blank +lines will also cause errors in math mode. + The distance between paragraphs is determined by the \par- +agraphskip markup. The default value for \paragraphskip is +"0 points plus 3 points minus 0 points". The "plus/minus" specification +allows up to 3 additional points to be added between paragraphs to get the +bottom of each page to line up properly is you are using \normalbottom. + The indent at the beginning of each paragraph is determined by the +\paragraphindent markup. The default value for indentation is 24 points. + For a complete discussion of how paragraphs are read in and formatted, +refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4164a4a16a --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|PAR-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify +\paragraphindent, \paragraphskip, \justify, or \hypenon. +The defaults given are for \monospace jobs. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d3d2f1de79 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|PAR-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify +\paragraphindent, \paragraphskip, \justify, or \hypenon. +The defaults given areã|notã%for \monospace jobs. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..771ae0c672 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|PARTã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\partformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eee751234e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| part | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \part markup starts a new page, centers the title in 12 point Computer +Modern bold, and enters the title in the table of contents. Furthermore, +the \part markup places the part title in the center of a blank page (called +a half-title page). Parts are numbered. Each heading markup can be used as +often as necessary. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example would print the title "Human Sciences" on a half title page, +then skip to a new page where it begins the paragraph "Humanity is still + . . ." + +in order. + +\part{Human Sciences} +\newpage +Humanity is still the measure of . . . + + ã|Notes:ã% +To change how a part looks, use the \partformat markup. + If you are using \monospace, the part title is printed in monospace bold +instead of Computer Modern 12 point bold. + Each time you enter \part, the chapter number and subhead numbers are +reset to zero. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..629dae4e29 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| paragraphbox | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\pbã% + +Parameters: ã|textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Whole paragraphs can be put into a \drawbox if you use \vbox with the +\drawbox. The resulting box will extend into the left and right margins by +the sum of the \drawboxmat and \drawboxrulesize. If you use \paragraphbox{ +| . . } instead of \drawbox{\vbox{ . . . }}, the paragraph size is reduced | +such that the box will fit within the current margins. + + ã|Example:ã% +This illustrates the difference between a paragraph boxed with \paragraphbox +and \drawbox. + + \paragraphbox{{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating + Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant + + Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for + articles are assigned to and held by the authors.} + \drawbox{\vbox{The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena + is the research arm of Giga Geologicals, Inc. No apologies + are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments. + The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy.}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| |. +| ........................................................................... |. +| . The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center |. +| . for Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for |. +| . articles are assigned to and held by the authors. |. +| ........................................................................... |. +| . The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Gig |. +| . Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability o |. +| . experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. |. +| ........................................................................... |. +| |. ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Do not use this markup if you are using \monospace. + Do not use \paragraphbox around more than one page of formatted +material. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7c2523f3cd --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| printendnotes | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\penã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +To print the endnotes accumulated with the \autoendnote markup, use the +\printendnotes markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +To start a new page, center a title (such as "Notes"), and dump the +endnotes, enter: + +There is a well-marked division of +labor.\autoendnote{Such as it is. Things could be +different in the geological world, but they are not.} +Details of organization have evolved by an +optimization process. . . . +\newpage +\titlepage +\cl{\bd Notes} +\vs{\bl} +\printendnotes + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Notes | +| | +| 1. Such as it is. Things could be different in the geological world, but | +| they are not. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \printendnotes markup does not print the title "Note". It may be used +more than once in a paper; for example, you may want to print all endnotes +within a chapter at the end of the chapter rather than at the end of the +entire paper. The \printendnotes markup prints all endnotes accumulated up +to that point. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a49a225f25 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| pageformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\pageformat{\pagelength{11in} + \pagewidth{8.5in} + \topmargin{1in} + \bottommargin{1in} + \leftmargin{1.2in} + \rightmargin{1in} + \bindingadjust{0pt} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\pfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\pagelength, \pagewidth, \topmargin, +\bottommargin, \leftmargin, \rightmargin, \bindingadjust, +\galleywidthã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \pageformat markup specifies the page size and margins. The dimensions +and margins for the pages of a document are set with page formatting markup. +These submarkup are valid only within the \pageformat markup. Its seven +submarkup are described below. + +ã|pagelengthã% specifies the length of the page to be used. The default +page length, 11 inches is maximum for most printers. + +ã|pagewidthã% specifies the width of the page to be used. The default +page width, 8.5 inches, is maximum for most printers. The \pagewidth +and \rightmargin submarkup may optionally be replaced with the \galleywidth +submarkup. + +ã|topmarginã% sets the distance from the top of the paper to the first line +of text, excluding the top title(s). The default value is 1 inch. + +ã|bottommarginã% sets the distance from the bottom of the paper to the last +line of the text, excluding the bottom title(s). The default value is 1 +inch. + +ã|leftmarginã% sets the distance from the left edge of the page to the left +edge of the text. The default value is 1.2 inches. + +ã|rightmarginã% sets the distance from the right edge of the page to the +right edge of the text. The default value is 1 inch. The \pagewidth +and \rightmargin submarkup may optionally be replaced with the \galleywidth +submarkup. + +ã|bindingadjustã% is used to offset left and right margins, which is useful +for duplex printing (on both sides). The value given the \bindingadjust +submarkup will increase the left margin on odd pages and decrease the left +margin on even pages. The page text width is not shortened, only the +margin. The default value is {0pt}. + +ã|galleywidthã% may be substituted for \pagewidth and \rightmargin to +determine the width of the text. The \galleywidth has the same dimension +as \hsize. You cannot use \galleywidth in the same fashion, however, as +\hsize. + + ã|Example:ã% +This custom source has 90 point (1 1/4inch) left and right margins. + +\pageformat{\leftmargin{90pt} + \rightmargin{90pt}} + + ã|Example:ã% +This custom source sets up a 9 inch by 6 inch page size. The margins have +been decreased accordingly. A binding adjust value has been added. + +\pageformat{\pagelength{9in} + \topmargin{.5in} + \bottommargin{.5in} + + \leftmargin{.6in} + \galleywidth{4.9in} + \bindingadjust{.2in} + } + + ã|Notes:ã% +Do note include \pagewidth and \rightmargin in the \pageformat markup if you +use the \galleywidth submarkup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c387a6fc35 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| putincontents | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\picnã% + +Parameters: ã|text and markupã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Major headings and the first two levels of subheadings are automatically +placed in a table of contents (if one is called). Any heading, text, or +markup can be put in the table of contents using the \putincontents markup +(abbreviated \pic). + This markup has one parameter, but that parameter can be either markup +to manipulate the table of contents itself or the text, usually a heading, +to be put in the contents. Note that in the example the page number and dot +leadering to separate it from the text were both included. + There are three levels of contents: the first (\pic1) puts text and/or +markup into the primary table of contents; \pic2 puts text and/or markup +into the list of figures; \pic3 puts text and/or markup into the list of +tables. + + Refer to the example on the next page. + + ã|Example:ã% +To create an Abstract that conforms to the Washington State University +graduate school's thesis requirements and print the abstract title in the +table of contents, enter: + +\newpage +\putincontents1{ABSTRACT\leader\pagenumber\par} +\doublespace +\vsk{6\bl} +\centerlinesbegin +\bd EFFECTIVENESS OF PRISM TRAINING +ON THE IMPROVEMENT OF READING +AT THE FIFTH GRADE LEVEL +ABSTRACT +\singlespace +\vs{2\bl} +\rm by Ray Elmer Brown, Ph.D. +Washington State University, 1979 +\vs{1\bl} + +\centerlinesend +\nin Chairman: Lloyd B. Johnson +\vs{1\bl} +The text of the abstract follows at this point . . . + +\pic2{LIST OF FIGURES\leader vi} +\pic3{LIST OF TABLES\leader viii} +\setpagenumber{0} +\chapter{Introduction} + +(Note, single spacing will return to double spacing after the +\centerlinesend markup, since it acts as a delimiter with +\centerlinesbegin.) + +The abstract would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| iv | +| | +| | +| EFFECTIVENESS OF PRISM TRAINING | +| ON THE IMPROVEMENT OF READING | +| AT THE FIFTH GRADE LEVEL | +| ABSTRACT | +| | +| | +| by Ray Elmer Brown, Ph.D. | +| Washington State University, 1979 | +| | +| Chairman: Lloyd B. Johnson | +| | +| The text of the abstract follows at this point . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The table of contents generated would contain: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... iii | +| ABSTRACT. . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . .....iv | +| List of Figures ... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... .vi | +| List of Tables .... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. . viii | +| Introduction .. ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ..... 1 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Notice in the sample source file illustrated on the previous page that the +List of Figure's and List of Table's page numbers were manually put into the +\putincontents markup. This is the only way to have these placed into the +table of contents. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cb2aca4f66 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| paragraphindent | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\pinã% + +Parameters: ã|indentã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Throughout an entire document, paragraphs have 24 points indentation on the +first line of each paragraph. This value may be changed by modifying the +default with \paragraphindent. All following paragraphs will then exhibit +the new indent. + + ã|Example:ã% +The first paragraph indent has been set to 14 points for comparison with the +second paragraph which has a \paragraphindent of 24 points. + +\paragraphindent{14pt} +{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating + +Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant +Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for +articles are assigned to and held by the authors. +\par +\pin{24pt} +The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm +of Giga Geologicals, Inc. +No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of +experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect +company policy. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center for | +| Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for articles | +| are assigned to and held by the authors. | +| The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Giga | +| Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of | +| experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +If you are using \monospace, it is best to define the indent in tenths of an +inch or in em's. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9115410ad1 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| plaintexmathon | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup can be used to make the dollar sign ($) the valid math mode +indicator as is used in PLAIN TEX instead of the TEXT1 math mode indicator, +the at sign (@). + + ã|Example:ã% + +\plaintexmathon +$x+y=100$ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +Do not use this markup with \monospace. + If used, it should be specified at the top of your document. You will +need to use the TEX \catcode markup to change back to using the at sign as +the math mode indicator: + +\catcode'44=12 + +For more on the \catcode markup, refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9cba3d9d1e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| pagenumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\pnã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \pagenumber markup merely places the current page number wherever the +markup appears. + + ã|Example:ã% +In running heads, \pagenumber numbers the pages. + +\runningheadformat{\bothpages{\line{\rm + \lft{Southern Bays}\rt{page \pagenumber}} + \vs{2pt} + \hrule + \vs{1\bl} + } + } + +The running head would look like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Southern Bays 1 | +| ........................................................................... | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you want no page numbers, then enter the following: + +\runningheadformat{\bothpage{}} + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8260c9d69e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| poplevel | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\pplã% + +Parameters: ã|levelã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup is used in counting lines for line numbering in the margin of a +document. The level number is TEX's stacking level number. The default is +pop level 7. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you must change to a different pop level, 9 for example, enter: + +\poplevel{9} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is +ignored for all other printers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7e44bb2dbd --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| preface | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\preã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Each preface starts a new page, centers the title in bold, and enters it in +the table of contents (if one is printed). The preface is not numbered. +Each heading markup can be used as often as necessary. + + ã|Example:ã% +\today +\preface{Acknowledgments} +I am grateful for the assistance and financial support +of the Grand Foundation for . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Acknowledgments | +| | +| I am grateful for the assistance and financial support of the Grand | +| Foundation for . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +You can modify the default style for a preface with the \prefaceformat +markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8fd4f9faf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|PREFACEã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\prefaceformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c0f4cde759 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| prefaceformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\prefaceformat{\titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + \cl{\twelvept\bd \prefacetitle} + \vs{1\bl}} + \incontents{yes} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\prfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \prefaceformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the +appearance of the preface title. There are two submarkup: + +ã|titleformatã% controls the appearance of the part title banner. You +may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \centerline within +\titleformat as Nested Markup. You may also use: + ã|prefacetitle.ã% prints the most recent preface title. + +ã|incontentsã% places the preface title in contents (if one is printed). +Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." + + ã|Example:ã% +In this example, the preface starts a new page, the title is centered in +bold, and one line is skipped afterwards. No preface is put in contents. + +\prefaceformat{\titleformat{\newpage + \cl{\bd \prefacetitle} + \vs{1\bl} + } + \incontents{no} + } + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \prefaceformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are +used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..50b159f13f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| printingnumbers | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\prinã% + +Parameters: ã|statusã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup is used to start the printing of line numbering in the margin of +a document. Status is true or false. + + ã|Example:ã% +To enable line numbers to be printed, enter: + +\printingnumbers{true} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is +ignored for all other printers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f149a6007e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \printendnotes (\pen) COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \printendnotes (\pen) command will space down the amount specified in the +\endnoteformat{\skipbefore}} and print all accumulated endnotes. The +\printendnotes (\pen) format is: + + \printendnotes + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3f796827af --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| printindex | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|index numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \printindex markup sorts and prints the index entries generated with the +\index markup. The \printindex markup would usually come at the end of a +document before the table of contents. This markup has the format + +\printindexN + +where N is the index number: 1, 2 or 3. By default, the index is +printed using the indent style of index in ten point Computer Modern. It +is recommended that you print the index in two columns (\twocolumns). For +a complete list of the defaults and how to modify them, refer to the +\indexformat markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +The following illustrates how to place an index at the end of a document, +after the last appendix, and before the table of contents. Assume the table +of contents is to begin on page "iv". + +\appendix{Sample Data} + +\preface{Index} +\twocolumns +\printindex1 +\onecolumns +\tableofcontents{-4} + +Using the \preface markup will start a new page with the title +"Index" at the top of the page. Then \twocolumns will begin two column +formatting (typical for indexes). Next \printindex1 will sort index "1" and +print the sorted index according to the defaults set by the \indexformat +markup. After printing the last of the index, \onecolumn will switch back +to single column mode before printing the table of contents. + + ã|Example:ã% +Sometimes multiple indexes are required. If you had used \index1 and +\index2, then you would use \printindex1 and \printindex2 to print them out: + +\index1item in first index +\index2item in second index +\preface{Index One} +\twocolumns +\printindex1 +\onecolumns +\preface{Index Two} +\twocolumns +\printindex2 +\onecolumns + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5a665edd5e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| paragraphskip | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\pskã% + +Parameters: ã|units of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +This markup causes all following paragraphs to be separated by the new +distance. The \paragraphskip is expressed using valid units of measurement +in TEXT1. The default value is 0 points. + + ã|Example:ã% +The first two paragraphs used a paragraph skip of 10 points. The third one +used a skip of 20 points. + +\paragraphskip{10pt} +{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating +Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant + +Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for +articles are assigned to and held by the authors. +\par +The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm +of Giga Geologicals, Inc. + +\psk{20pt} +No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of +experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect +company policy. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center for | +| Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for articles | +| are assigned to and held by the authors. | +| | +| The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Giga | +| Geologicals, Inc. | +| | +| | +| No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments. | +| The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The "plus3pt" after the setting of "0pt" means that up to 3 points +additional space may be added before each paragraph, if this space is needed +to fill out a page when using \normalbottom. If the \paragraphskip is set +to "minus1pt", it implies that up to 1 point may be subtracted before each + +paragraphs if needed to fill out a page when using \normalbottom. Since the +leading is usually only 2 points more than the size of the type, the "minus" +value should not be more than 1 point. + If you are using \monospace, it is best to specify the units in blank +lines. For example, + +\paragraphskip{1\bl} + +There are 6 \bl in an inch with \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..31d6772c21 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| qquad | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \qquad markup leaves two quads of space. It is two em spaces in the +current type size. It can be used in text, "as is," or math mode. + + ã|Example:ã% +\tat{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr +Changes after Nuclear Exchanges} +\vs{6pt} +\settabs\+\qquad&number\qquad&number\qquad +\+&number\qquad&number\qquad&10,000&\cr +\+&1000&-22&8&7&13\cr + +\+&3000&9&6&8&10\cr + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Table 1 | +| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) | +| Changes after Nuclear Exchanges | +| | +| | +| 1000 -22 8 7 13 | +| 3000 9 6 8 10 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + + ã|Notes:ã% + +\qquad=\horizontalspace{2em}=\quad\quad. In \twelvept, \qquad approximately +24 points; in \tenpt, \qquad approximately 20 points. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ffd0b320b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| quad | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +A printer's quad of space used to be a blank square of type, 1 em high and +1 em wide, equivalent in size to a capital "M." A TEXT1 quad is a unit of +horizontal space. It is one em space in the current type size. The \quad +markup can be used in text, "as is," and math mode. + + ã|Example:ã% +Consider the input for this table: + +\tat{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr +Changes after Nuclear Exchanges} +\vs{6pt} + +\settabs\+\quad&number\quad&number\quad +\+&number\quad&number\quad&number&\cr +\+&1000&-22&8&7&13\cr +\+&3000&9&6&8&10\cr + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Table 1 | +| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) | +| Changes after Nuclear Exchanges | +| | +| 1000 -22 8 7 13 | +| 3000 9 6 8 10 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +\quad=\horizontalspace{1em}. In \twelvept, \quad approximately 12 points; +in \tenpt, \quad approximately 10 points. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ab947ecb1e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| raggedbottom | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By default, TEXT1 tries to make the top and bottom of each page of text line +up. If you are not concerned with having the bottom of each page line up, +you can enter \raggedbottom. If you have specified \raggedbottom and you +want to go back to the default, enter \normalbottom. + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4ffcb945d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|RESUMEã%model is a general resume model. It is a template. You may modify +it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..22999b573a --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| runningheadformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\runningfootformat{ + \bothpages{\vs{1\bl} + \line{\twelvept\rm\lft{} + \ctr{}\rt{}}} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\rffã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\bothpages, \evenpages, \oddpagesã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \runningfootformat markup provides running titles at the bottom of all +pages except the title page. The default running bottom title for TEXT1 is +blank. + +\bothpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of both the +even and odd pages. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within +it, you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup +\ctr, \lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule +and \verticalspace. + +\evenpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of each +even page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, +you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr, +\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and +\verticalspace. + +\oddpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of each +odd page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, you +may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr, +\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and +\verticalspace. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example prints the date and author's initials at the bottom of each +page. + +\runningfootformat{ + \bothpages{\vs{18pt} + \line{\rm\lft{\today}\ctr{}\rt{JNP}} + } + } + +which produces a running foot as illustrated on the next page. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| January 13, 1987 JNP | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +This example illustrates the use of odd and even page layout with two lines. +The page number alternates sides so that it appears on the outside of the +page. The title appears above the subtitle on even pages. The author's +name appears above the journal name on odd pages. + +\runningfootformat{ + \evenpages{\line{\lft{\pagenumber} + \rt{Sociogeology}} + \vs{2pt}} + \line{\rt{A New Science}} + \vs{\bl}} + \oddpages{\line{\lft{A. Chert} + \rt{\pagenumber}} + + \vs{2pt}} + \line{\lft{SPP---UP}} + \vs{\bl}} + } + +which produces on even page numbers a running foot that looks like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 22 Sociogeology | +| A New Science | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +and produces on odd page numbers a running foot that looks like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| A. Chert 11 | +| SPP---UP | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +An empty \lft, \ctr, or \rt may be omitted as was done in the above example. + A construct such as, + +\rff{\bothpages{ + \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today} + \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}} + +will not print the date centered on the page: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| page 7 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with +\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the +date: + +\rff{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn} + + \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}} + \vs{-\bl} + \line{\ctr{\today}}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| page 8 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + The \runningfootformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if +both are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..28f4ce697f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| runningheadformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\rhfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\bothpages, \evenpages, \oddpagesã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \runningheadformat markup provides running titles at the top of all +pages except the title page. The default running top title for TEXT1 is a +right justified page number. + +ã|bothpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of both the +even and odd pages. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within +it, you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup +\ctr, \lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule +and \verticalspace. + +ã|evenpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of each +even page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, +you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr, +\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and +\verticalspace. + +ã|oddpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of each +odd page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, you +may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr, +\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and +\verticalspace. + + ã|Example:ã% +To customize running titles, you modify the \runningheadformat for the top +titles and the \runningfootformat for bottom titles. In this example, +"Sociogeology" and a page number are placed at the top of every page. + +\runningheadformat{\bothpages{\it + \line{\lft{Sociogeology}\ctr{}\rt{\pn}} + \vs{2pt} + \hrule + \verticalspace{18pt} + } +} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Sociogeology 1 | +| ........................................................................... | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +This example alternates the author's name and page number at the top of even +and odd pages. It complements the last example on the previous page. + +\rhf{\evenpages{\vs{\bl} + \line{\lft{Chert}}} + \oddpages{\vs{\bl} + \line{\rt{\pagenumber}}} + } + +Even pages will look like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chert | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Odd pages will look like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 4 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +An empty \lft, \ctr, or \rt may be omitted as was done in the above example. + A construct such as, + +\rhf{\bothpages{ + \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today} + \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}} + +will not print the date centered on the page: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| page 6 February 5, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with +\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the +date: + +\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn} + + \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}} + \vs{-\bl} + \line{\ctr{\today}}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| page 7 February 5, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + The \runningheadformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if +both are used. + If you want no page numbers, then enter the following: + +\runningheadformat{\bothpages{}} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bed41f21f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| rightindent | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\rinã% + +Parameters: ã|units of measurementã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \rightindent markup adds (or subtracts) the amount from the current +right margin (default is zero). The indentation remains until another +\rightindent overrides it. This markup causes a break in text. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, +zinc, selenium, and copper, appearing in suitable +proportions. +\vs{50pt} +\lin{1in} + +\rightindent{1.5in} +{\bd Figure 2}. +Physiognomic similarities between the earth and +human beings. +\rightindent{-1.5in} +\lin{0in} +\vs{10pt} +Most elemental abundances are the same in the +lithosphere and the anthrosphere. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, zinc, selenium, and | +| copper, appearing in suitable proportions. | +| | +| Figure 2. Physiognomic similarities between | +| the earth and human beings. | +| | +| Most elemental abundances are the same in the lithosphere and the | +| anthrosphere. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +The previous example could have used grouping as illustrated below and the +same output would have been generated. If you do grouping, be sure there is +a \paragraph markup before the closing right curly brace of the group. + +Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, +zinc, selenium, and copper, appearing in suitable +proportions. +\vs{50pt} +{\lin{1in} +\rightindent{1.5in} +{\bd Figure 2}. +Physiognomic similarities between the earth and +human beings. +\par +} +\vs{10pt} +Most elemental abundances are the same in the +lithosphere and the anthrosphere. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, zinc, selenium, and | +| copper, appearing in suitable proportions. | +| | +| Figure 2. Physiognomic similarities between | +| the earth and human beings. | +| | +| Most elemental abundances are the same in the lithosphere and the | +| anthrosphere. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..92e51079b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| rightline | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\rlã% + +Parameters: ã|text to be right justifiedã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \rightline markup right justifies individual lines. This markup ends +the previous paragraph. The only parameter for this markup is text. + + ã|Example:ã% +yet some of the reviews of "Sociogeology" have +been mixed, especially from academics. +\rightline{This theory is 'on the rocks.'} +\rl{\it Clay Gneiss} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| yet some of the reviews of "Sociogeology" have been mixed, especially from | +| academics. | +| This theory is 'on the rocks.' | +| Clay Gneiss | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d714ff65a --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| rightlinesbegin | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\rlbã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \rightlinesbegin markup begins right justifying all following lines. +Vertical spacing and font changes are the only markup permitted after it. +There are no parameters or markup options. End a \rightlinesbegin with a +matching \rightlinesend. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\rightlinesbegin +This theory is 'on the rocks.' +{\it Clay Gneiss} +\rightlinesend + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| This theory is 'on the rocks.' | +| Clay Gneiss | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Each \rightlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \rightlinesend. + You cannot use \rightlinesbegin within any of the following markup: +\appendim, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox, +\figure, \footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part, +\preface, \rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada, +\subheadb, \subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4c4ec76858 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| rightlinesend | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\rleã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \rightlinesend markup ends lines that are being right justified with +\rightlinesbegin. This markup causes a paragraph break. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\rightlinesbegin +This theory is 'on the rocks.' +{\it Clay Gneiss} +\rightlinesend + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| This theory is 'on the rocks.' | +| Clay Gneiss | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Each \rightlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \rightlinesend. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..de8ed390f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| roman | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\rmã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Roman is a medium-weight type good for reading. It is the default face for +TEXT1. It is usually specified as the default font at the beginning of a +paper, so that it will be in effect for most of the paper. Roman can also +be used to terminate the use of a special typeface, such as italic or bold. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\twelvept +\italic now! \roman It is important to realize +\it the facts! ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| now! It is important to realize the facts! | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +This example is the same as the one above, except that grouping was used to +change from the roman font back to italics. + +\tenpt +\italic now! {\roman It is important to realize} +the facts! + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| now! It is important to realize the facts! | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af80dc37cf --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| rightragged | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\rrã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \rightragged markup turns off right justification. If you only want +to right justify a certain section of the document, then you would use a +combination of the \justify and \rightragged markup. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\rightragged +The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate +oversimplification comes complex obfuscation and +general theoretification. +Behavioral research will lead in this direction, as + +the general theory of Sociogeology predicts the . . . +\justify +Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high +temperatures, fever, for instance. +Metamorphic crystallization involves low . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate oversimplification | +| comes complex obfuscation and general theoretification. Behavioral | +| research will lead in this direction, as the general theory of | +| Sociogeology predicts the . . . | +| Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high temperatures, | +| fever, for instance. Metamorphic crystallization involves low . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +The default values for space skips is listed below. When you are using +\monospace you get the values in the right column. + + Composing Printers Typewriter Printers + \rightskip plus 1fil plus 10em + \spaceskip .35em 1em + \xspaceskip .55em 1em diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..71a72ad0a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| rule | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \rule markup skips a blank line and draws a horizontal line (rule). +Rules are used to separate material, such as tables or sections. No extra +vertical space is skipped after the rule, so you may need to add some with +\vs. + + ã|Example:ã% + +\tabletitle{Elements of the Spheres} +\rule +\vs{6pt} +\tabskip 3em plus 3em minus 1em +\halign{\lft{#}&&\rt{#}\hs{20pt}\cr + +Element&\omit\ctr{Anthrosphere}&\omit\ctr{Lithosphere}\cr +Oxygen&62.1\phantom{0}&60.6\phantom{0}\cr +Hydrogen&1.1\phantom{0}&0.1\phantom{0}\cr +Aluminum&0.22&11.54\cr} +\rule +\vs{6pt} +\nin Most elemental abundances are the same in the . . . ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| Table 1 | +| Elements of the Spheres | +| | +| ........................................................................... | +| | +| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere | +| Oxygen 62.1 60.6 | +| Hydrogen 1.1 0.1 | +| Aluminum 0.22 11.54 | +| ........................................................................... | +| Most elemental abundances are the same in the . . . | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +If you want a rule of a different height, depth, or width than illustrated +with \rule and if you are not using \monospace, then use \hrule. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..259d368dcb --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|RUNFOOTã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\runningfootformat which is carried at the bottom of every page +except the title page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0dd2248ba3 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|RUNHEADã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\runningheadformat which is carried at the top of every page +except the title page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..05b9299a2c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setappendixnumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\sanã% + +Parameters: ã|previous appendix numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The appendix number will be automatically incremented by one for each +use of \appendix. The appendix number can be reset by inserting the +\setappendixnumber markup before the next occurrence of \appendix. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, the first appendix is number 1. If you want to start with +appendix 5, you would enter: + +\setappendixnumber{4} +\appendix{Title of the fifth appendix} + + + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setappendixnumber parameter is the previous +appendix number, not the next appendix number. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..24ce71ea8b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| sameauthor | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\sauã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \sameauthor markup allows you to substitute a standard rule for an +author's name for multiple references in a bibliography. The default rule +is 3 em spaces wide; the default width may be changed in \bibliographyformat +markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +\bibliography{References Cited} +\frenchspacing +\bibentry +Roszak, T. 1972. {\it Where the Wasteland Ends}. +New York: Harper \& Row. + +\bie +Weldon, S. 1971. {\it Waging Peace}. +Wilmington: M. \&\ R. Wolfe, Limited. +\bie +\sameauthor 1983. {\it The Metaindustry: War and +Economic Development}. +Los Angeles: Thompson Books. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| References Cited | +| | +| Roszak, T. 1972. Where the Wasteland Ends. New York: Harper & Row. | +| | +| Weldon, S. 1971. Waging Peace. Wilmington: M. & R. Wolfe, Limited. | +| | +| ....1983. The Metaindustry: War and Economic Development. Los Angeles: | +| Thompson Books. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..08b572cb2d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setchapternumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\scnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous chapter numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The chapter number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of +\chapter. The chapter number can be reset by inserting the \setchapternum- +ber markup before the next occurrence of \chapter. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, the first chapter is number 1. If you want to start with +chapter 5, you would enter: + +\setchapternumber{4} +\chapter{Title of the fifth chapter} + + + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setchapternumber parameter is the previous +chapter number, not the next chapter number. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b032b8a8d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setendnotenumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\sennã% + +Parameters: ã|previous endnote numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The endnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each +use of \autoendnote. The endnote number can be reset by adding the +\setendnotenumber markup before the next occurrence of an \autoendnote. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, endnote numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset +in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \setendnotenumber +to the \titleformat: + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} + + \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl} + \setendnotenumber{0} + \setsubheadanumber{0} + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + \incontents{yes}} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setendnotenumber parameter is the previous +endnote number, not the next endnote number. If you want the next +\autoendnote to be endnote 90, then specify + +\setendnotenumber{89} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..53b535a5e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| settabs | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|number of columnsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The body of the table is created with the \settabs n \columns markup, which +establishes a number (n) of equal-size tabular columns (\columns). + Each new column after the first is indicated with the TEXT1 tab +character (&). Each row is started with the \+ markup and ended with the +\cr markup (which is an abbreviation for carriage return on typewriters). + The ampersand (&) is like the TAB key on many typewriters; it tells +TEXT1 to advance to the next tab position, where there is a tab at the right +edge of each column. But & is not exactly like a mechanical typewriter +TAB, because it first backs up to the beginning of the current column +before advancing to the next. In this way you can always tell what column +you are tabbing to, by counting the number of &s; that is handy, because + +variable-width type otherwise makes it difficult to know whether you have +passed a tab position. + The ampersands are different from tabs in another way, too: TEXT1 +ignores spaces after &, hence you can conveniently finish a column by typing +& at the end of a line in your input file, without worrying that an extra +blank space will be introduced there. Incidentally, TEXT1 also ignores +spaces after \+, so that the first column is treated like the others. + You can say \cr before you have specified a complete set of columns, if +the remaining columns are blank. The last \cr ends the settabs. No other +ending is necessary; normal text may follow. + + ã|Example:ã% + +can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. +\par +\tabletitle{Etymological Clues} +\settabs 3 \columns +\+\it Term&\it Geological&\it Social Reference\cr +\+boss&small rock&supervisor\cr +\+domehead&pushing through&intellectual\cr +\+fossil&turned to stone&age\cr +\+creep&move slowly&person\cr +\+streak&move quickly&naked\cr +\+ejecta&very quickly&mating\cr +\+sublimate&change to gas&dream\cr +\+trench&sediments&mouth\cr + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. | +| | +| Table 1 | +| Etymological Clues | +| | +| Term Geological Social Reference | +| boss small rock supervisor | +| domehead pushing through intellectual | +| fossil turned to stone age | +| creep move slowly person | +| streak move quickly naked | +| ejecta very quickly mating | +| sublimate change to gas dream | +| trench sediments mouth | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +You may not want all of the columns to be the same size, so there is another +way to set them, by typing "\+sample line\cr" immediately after \settabs. +In this case tabs are placed at the positions of the &s in the sample line, +but the sample line itself does not appear in the output. Look through +the table and determine the biggest entry in each column; the sample line +is then constructed by typing the widest entry in the first column, then +the widest in each subsequent column, omitting the last column. Be sure to +include some extra space (\horizontalspace{}) between columns in the sample +line, so that the columns won't touch each other. + +can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. +\par +\tabletitle{Etymological Clues} +\settabs\+\hs{4pt}&domeheads\hs{4pt} + &material pushing through + \hs{10pt}&Intellectual\cr +\+&\it Term&\it Geological&\it Social Reference\cr +\+&trench&subducted sediments&mouth\cr + +\+&dike&material holding back&female\cr +\+&domehead&material pushing through&intellectual\cr +\+&fossil&life turned to stone&age\cr +\+&cleavage&the tendency to split&bosom\cr + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. | +| | +| Table 2 | +| Etymological Clues | +| | +| Term Geological Social Reference | +| trench subducted sediments mouth | +| dike material holding back female | +| domehead material pushing through intellectual | +| fossil life turned to stone age | +| cleavage the tendency to split bosom | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you want to put something right justified (flush right) in its column, +just type \rt{text} where text is the text to be right justified; Be sure +to type & after it, so that TEX will be sure to move the information all +the way until it touches the next tab. Similarly, if you want to center +something in its column, type \ctr{text} where text is the text to be +centered. Notice also the use of \phantom in decimal alignment. + + \centerline{\bd Table 1} + \centerline{Etymological Clues} + \settabs \+\hs{20pts}&Aluminum\quad&Anthrosphere& + \hs{20pt}&Lithosphere\quad\cr + \+&\lft{Element}&\rt{Anthrosphere}& + &\rt{Lithosphere}&\cr + \+&Sodium&\rt{0.001\phantom{0}}&&\rt{0.4\phantom{000}}\cr + \+&Silicon&\rt{.0001}&&\rt{20.2\phantom{000}}\cr + \+&Aluminum&\rt{0.22\phantom{00}}&& + \rt{11.54\phantom{00}}\cr + \+&Carbon&\rt{19.1001}&&\rt{0.0202}\cr + + \+&Nitrogen&\rt{3.2205}&&\rt{.0208}\cr + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Table 1 | +| Etymological Clues | +| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere | +| Sodium 0.001 0.4 | +| Silicon .0001 20.2 | +| Aluminum 0.22 11.54 | +| Carbon 19.1001 0.0202 | +| Nitrogen 3.2205 .0208 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +Tab positions are remembered, until they are reset with another \settabs, +regardless of text and other markup following. + The operation of tabs addresses one line at a time; this allows multiple +page tables. + You cannot use \figure, \drawbox or \paragraphbox around a \settabs. + Refer to The TEXbook for more on \phantom. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0c3ef81afc --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setfigurenumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\sfnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous figure numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The figure number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of +\figure. The figure number can be reset by adding the \setfigurenumber +markup before the next occurrence of \figure. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, figure numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset +in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \setfigurenumber +to the \titleformat: + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} + + \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl} + \setfigurenumber{0} + \setsubheadanumber{0} + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + \incontents{yes}} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setfigurenumber parameter is the previous +figure number, not the next figure number. If you want the next \figure to +be Figure 90, then specify + +\setfigurenumber{89} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..369f764e65 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setfootnotenumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\sfnnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous footnote numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The footnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each +use of \autofootnote. The footnote number can be reset by adding the +\setfootnotenumber markup before the next occurrence of an autofootnote. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, footnote numbers are reset in parts. If you also want +them reset in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding +\setfootnotenumber to the \titleformat: + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} + + \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl} + \setfootnotenumber{0} + \setsubheadanumber{0} + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + \incontents{yes}} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setfootnotenumber parameter is the previous +footnote number, not the next footnote number. If you want the next +\autofootnote to be footnote 90, then specify + +\setfootnotenumber{89} + + The \setfootnotenumber markup has no effect on the \footnote markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..241c41268b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| selectfontset | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\selectfontset{cm12}{twelvept}{14pt} +\selectfontset{cm10}{tenpt}{12pt} +\twelvept + +Abbreviation: ã|\sfsã% + +Parameters: ã|catalog name, user's reference, leadingã% + + ã|Description:ã% +For a typical document, you will need both a font set and a math set. +The default font set selections consist of two sets for composing printers: +\twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and \tenpt +for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle. Typically, the \select- +fontset markup is placed in the front of your document. The format of this +markup is + +\selectfontset{catalog name}{user's reference name}{leading between lines} + +where catalog name is the system name for that font set. (Complete lists +of the catalog names can be found by going to the TEXT1 help menu, or by +looking in the Font Catalogs.) The user's reference is a name of your own +devising. This name, when prefaced with a backslash will give you access to +that font set. The leading is the interlineskip specification. + Users of typewriter printers use different \selectfontset markup, which +offers "standard", "underscore" (for italic), and "bold" monospaced faces. +These are the only fonts available to such printers. + Each font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called +by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation: +\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc), +\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi). +Not all font sets have all nine faces available. If a particular face is +not available, a warning message will be printed. + + ã|Example:ã% +After entering the \selectfontset, + +\selectfontset{cm11}{eleven}{default} +\eleven + +each time \eleven is specified, you would be using the Computer Modern font +set at a 11 point size (cm11). The third parameter ("default") indicates +that TEXT1 will use the default value for \interlineskip, in this case 13 +points. Then, whenever you switch to bold (\bd) you would get Computer +Modern bold at a 11 point size. If you were to specify \it you would get +Computer Modern italic at 11 points. + + ã|Example:ã% +Consider this example for switching from 9 point to a 8 point size. +The \eightpoint is set with \interlineskip{9pt} instead of the default +\interlineskip{10pt}, leaving less space between lines. + +\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default} +\selectfontset{cm8}{eightpoint}{9pt} +\eightpoint + +\centerline{\ninepoint\bd Sociogeology} +\vs{12pt} +\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert} +\vs{12pt} +"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Sociogeology | +| | +| by Achilles Chert | +| | +| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Again, not all font sets have all nine faces available. If a particular +face is not available, a warning message will be printed. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4c5bb98f47 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| subheada | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\shaã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \subheada markup creates a first level subheading, which skips two +baselines, prints the title in bold type, then skips one more baseline. It +does not begin a new page. Its title is placed in the table of contents +automatically. + + ã|Example:ã% +more realistic. +\subheada{Nationalism and War} +Nationalism is directly related to war. +Lord Acton observed that . . . + +which prints: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| more realistic. | +| | +| | +| Nationalism and War | +| | +| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | +| . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Use \subheadaformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults. + TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheada. It discourages +page breaking between the \subheada and the first line of the following +paragraph. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3cf2d51cd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| subheadaformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\removelastskip + \goodbreak\vs{2\bl} + \twelvept + \bd\nin\subheadatitle + \par\nobreak + \vs{1\bl}\nobreak + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + \incontents{yes} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\shafã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \subheadaformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading +title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheada is to +appear. + +ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in +Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead +numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadanumber is incremented. + +ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the subhead title is +to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip, +\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat +as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of +\subheadaformat: + + * \subheadanumberprints the most recent subheada number. + + * \subheadatitleprints the most recent subheada title. + +ã|\incontentsã% places the subheada title by default in the contents (if one is +printed). Printing in the table of contents can be suppressed by changing +to "no": + +\shaf{\incontents{no}} + + ã|Example:ã% +Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. For \subheada to +include a number like "pp.cc-aa" where "pp" is the part number, "cc" is +the chapter number, and "aa" is the subheada number, you would modify the +\subheadaformat: + +\subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl} + \bd\partnumber.\chapternumber-\subheadanumber + \quad\subheadatitle\par + \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak} + \incontents{yes} +} + +more realistic. +\par +\subheada{Nationalism and War} +Nationalism is directly related to war. +Lord Acton observed that . . . + +The second subheada in the third chapter of the first part would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| more realistic. | +| | +| | +| 1.3-2 Nationalism and War | +| | +| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | +| . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \subheadaformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both +are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c4e302561 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| subheadb | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\shbã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \subheadb markup creates a second level subheading, which skips two +baselines, prints the title in italics, then skips one more baseline. It +does not begin a new page. Its title is placed in the table of contents +automatically. + + ã|Example:ã% +more realistic. +\par +\subheadb{Nationalism and War} +Nationalism is directly related to war. +Lord Acton observed that . . . + +which prints: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| more realistic. | +| | +| | +| Nationalism and War | +| | +| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | +| . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Use \subheadbformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults. + TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadb. It discourages +page breaking between the \subheadb and the first line of the following +paragraph. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7c0e27505b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| subheadbformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\removelastskip + \goodbreak\vs{2\bl} + \twelvept + \it\nin\subheadbtitle + \par\nobreak + \vs{1\bl}\nobreak + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + \incontents{yes} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\shbfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \subheadbformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading +title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadb is to +appear. + +ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in +Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead +numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadbnumber is incremented. + +ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã is used to describe how the subhead title is +to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip, +\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat +as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of +\subheadbformat: + + * \subheadbnumberprints the most recent subheadb number. + + * \subheadbtitleprints the most recent subheadb title. + +ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadb title by default in the contents (if one is +printed). Printing in the table of contents can be suppressed by changing +to "no": + +\shbf{\incontents{no}} + + ã|Example:ã% +Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. If you wanted +\subheadb to include a number like "pp.cc.aa.bb" where "pp" is the part +number, "cc" is the chapter number, "aa" is the subheada number, and "bb" is +the subheadb number, you would modify the \subheadbformat: + + \subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl} + \italic + \partnumber.\chapternumber.\subheadanumber.\subheadbnumber + \quad\subheadbtitle\par + \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak} + \incontents{yes} + } + + more realistic. + \subheadb{Nationalism and War} + Nationalism is directly related to war. + + Lord Acton observed that . . . + +The first subheadb in the second subheada of the third chapter of the first +part would print as: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| more realistic. | +| | +| | +| 1.3.2.1 Nationalism and War | +| | +| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | +| . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \subheadbformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both +are used. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..19133b8456 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| subheadc | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\shcã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \subheadc markup creates a third level subheading, which skips two +baselines, prints the title in roman type, then skips one more baseline. It +does not begin a new page. Its title is not placed in the table of contents +automatically. + + ã|Example:ã% +more realistic. +\subheadc{Nationalism and War} +Nationalism is directly related to war. +Lord Acton observed that . . . + +which prints: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| more realistic. | +| | +| | +| Nationalism and War | +| | +| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | +| . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Use \subheadcformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults. + TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadc. It discourages +page breaking between the \subheadc and the first line of the following +paragraph. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bb7cbe0822 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| subheadcformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\removelastskip + \goodbreak\vs{2\bl} + \twelvept + \rm\nin\subheadctitle + \par\nobreak + \vs{1\bl}\nobreak + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + \incontents{no} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\shcfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \subheadcformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading +title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadc is to +appear. + +ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in +Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead +numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadcnumber is incremented. + +ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the \subheadc title +is to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip, +\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat +as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of +\subheadcformat: + + * \subheadcnumberprints the most recent subheadc number. + + * \subheadctitleprints the most recent subheadc title. + +ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadc title in the contents (if one is printed). +By default, the title is not placed in the contents. Printing in the table +of contents can be included by changing to "yes": + +\shcf{\incontents{yes}} + + ã|Example:ã% +Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. If you wanted +\subheadc to include a number like "Section cc:" where "cc" is a bold +subheadc number, you could modify the \subheadcformat: + +\subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl} + \nin\bd Section \subheadcnumber: + \quad\subheadctitle\par + \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak} + \incontents{no} +} + +more realistic. +\subheadc{Nationalism and War} +Nationalism is directly related to war. +Lord Acton observed that . . . + +The third subheadc would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| more realistic. | +| | +| | +| Section 3: Nationalism and War | +| | +| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | +| . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \subheadcformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both +are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fa6cb2feaa --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| subheadd | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\shdã% + +Parameters: ã|titleã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \subheadd markup creates a fourth level subheading, which skips to a new +paragraph, prints the title in italics followed by a period, then continues +the paragraph. It does not begin a new page. Its title is not placed in +the table of contents automatically. + + ã|Example:ã% +more realistic. +\subheadd{Nationalism and War} +Nationalism is directly related to war. +Lord Acton observed that . . . + +which prints: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| more realistic. | +| Nationalism and War. Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord | +| Acton observed that . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Use \subheaddformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults. + TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadd. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..39b552a430 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| subheaddformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\goodbreak + {\twelvept + \it\subheaddtitle.} + \incontents{no} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\shdfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \subheaddformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading +title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadd is to +appear. + +ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in +Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead +numbers are not printed, even though the \subheaddnumber is incremented. + +ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the subhead title is +to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip, +\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat +as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of +\subheaddformat: + + * \subheaddnumberprints the most recent subheadd number. + + * \subheaddtitleprints the most recent subheadd title. + +ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadd title in the contents (if one is printed). +By default, the title is not placed in the contents. Printing in the table +of contents can be included by changing to "yes": + +\shdf{\incontents{yes}} + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted a subhead to place the title in a lable, you would modify the +\subheaddformat: + +\subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl} + \label{\subheaddtitle} + } + \incontents{no} +} + +more realistic. +\subheadd{Nationalism and War} +Nationalism is directly related to war. +Lord Acton observed that the increase in nationalism +significantly increases a country's ability to +protect itself . . . + +The fourth subheadd would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| more realistic. | +| | +| | +| | +| Nationalism | +| and War thatonthesmincreaseeinlynationalism significantlyctincreasesea | +| country's ability to protect itself . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \subheaddformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both +are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..63213a1656 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| selectmathset | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\selectmathset{cm97m}{mathdefault} +\mathdefault + +Abbreviation: ã|\smsã% + +Parameters: ã|catalog name, user's referenceã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \selectmathset markup loads type for use by math mode. Superscripted +footnotes, and mathematical equations, require the TEXT1 math mode. For +composing printers, the default for the primary (script) math set that is +used to set super or subscripts is a 9 point Computer Modern, the secondary +(script-script) math set which is used to set super-super or sub-subscripts +is 7 point Computer Modern. TEXT1 typewriter printers do not support math +mode. The format of this markup is + +\selectmathset{catalog name}{user's reference name} + +where catalog name is the system name for that math set. (Complete lists +of the catalog names can be found by going to the TEXT1 help menu, or by +looking in the Font Catalogs.) The design of this name is such that the +first digit(s) is the primary (script) size, the second digit(s) is the +secondary (script-script) size. The user's reference is a name of your own +devising. This name, when prefaced with a backslash will give you access to +that math set. + Typically, the \selectmathset markup is placed in the front of your +document with your \selectfontset markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +This math mode example uses a primary 14 point math font, instead of the +default, and a secondary math font of 12 point. + +\selectmathset{cm1412m}{bigmath} +\selectfontset{cm18}{bigfont}{default} +\bigfont +\bigmath +Human intelligence became possible when +@@C_{14}\to C_{1.4 \bullet 10^6}@@ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Typically, the \selectmathset markup is placed in the front of your document +with your \selectfontset markup. + TEXT1 typewriter printers do not support math mode. + Only the super and subscripts are affected by the math mode fonts +selected with the \selectmathset markup. + See The TEXbook for more on math mode. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..48597c9326 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Special Characters | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +In TeX there are 10 keyboard characters which have special meaning. They are: + + \ (backslash) } (right curly brace) { (left curly brace) + @ (at sign) # (pound sign) _ (underscore) + & (ampersand) % (percent sign) ~ (tilde) | (vertical bar) + +If you need any of these characters as part of your text you must precede all +but the tilde and vertical bar with a \ (backslash) or TeX will interpret them +as a TeX command. To print a tilde you must enter \tilde and for a vertical bar +enter \vbar. + +For example, the following input: + + Mom sent Tommy to the store and told him to buy 5\# potatoes, a + half gallon of 2\% milk and two packages of M\&Ms. + +would result in: + +Mom sent Tommy to the store and told him to buy 5# potatoes, a half gallon of +2% milk and two packages of M&Ms. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8377cd9a4a --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setpagenumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\spnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous page numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \setpagenumber markup resets the page number of a paper. The first page +of a document, commonly referred to as the title page, is treated as page +number "1". You can begin the document with a page number other than 1, or +renumber sections of the document. + The \setpagenumber markup can be specified anywhere in your document. +It changes the number of the current page. This can be particularly useful +if you are printing your document one part or chapter at a time. + To get pages in lower case roman numerals, for lead pages, enter a +negative number, for instance \setpagenumber{-1}. + + ã|Example:ã% +To set the page number so that the sentence beginning "Furthermore . . . " +is on page 11, enter + +as shown in this series of figures. +% insert four full-page figures +\setpagenumber{10} +\newpage +Furthermore, there are too many physical +similarities between human forms and earth forms +to dismiss. Indeed, they are made of the same . . . + + You could also have placed the \setpagenumber markup after the \newpage +and changed the number from 10 to 11: + +as shown in this series of figures. +% insert four full-page figures +\newpage +\setpagenumber{11} +Furthermore, there are too many physical + +similarities between human forms and earth forms +to dismiss. Indeed, they are made of the same . . . + + ã|Notes:ã% +To get pages in lower case roman numerals, for lead pages, enter a negative +number, for instance \setpagenumber{-1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fb40c3ae20 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setpartnumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\sptnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous part numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The part number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of +\part. The part number can be reset by inserting the \setpartnumber markup +before the next occurrence of \part. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, the first part is number 1. If you want to start with part 5, +you would enter: + +\setpartnumber{4} +\part{Title of the fifth part} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setpartnumber parameter is the previous part +number, not the next part number. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6b4085cc82 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setsubheadanumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ssanã% + +Parameters: ã|previous subheada numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The subheada number will be automatically incremented by one for each +use of \subheada. The subheada number can be reset by inserting the +\setsubheadanumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheada. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, the first subheada is number 1. If you want to start with +number 5, you would enter: + +\setsubheadanumber{4} +\subheada{Title of the fifth subheada} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setsubheadanumber parameter is the previous +subheada number, not the next subheada number. + The subheada number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter or +\appendix. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..df728a0689 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setsubheadbnumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ssbnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous subheadb numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The subheadb number will be automatically incremented by one for each +use of \subheadb. The subheadb number can be reset by inserting the +\setsubheadbnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadb. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, the first subheadb is number 1. If you want to start with +number 5, you would enter: + +\setsubheadbnumber{4} +\subheadb{Title of the fifth subheadb} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setsubheadbnumber parameter is the previous +subheadb number, not the next subheadb number. + The subheadb number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter, +\subheada, or \appendix. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c6db33d4e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setsubheadcnumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\sscnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous subheadc numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The subheadc number will be automatically incremented by one for each +use of \subheadc. The subheadc number can be reset by inserting the +\setsubheadcnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadc. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, the first subheadc is number 1. If you want to start with +number 5, you would enter: + +\setsubheadcnumber{4} +\subheadc{Title of the fifth subheadc} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setsubheadcnumber parameter is the previous +subheadc number, not the next subheadc number. + The subheadc number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter, +\subheada, \subheadb, or \appendix. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b93175860c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| setsubheaddnumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ssdnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous subheadd numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The subheadd number will be automatically incremented by one for each +use of \subheadd. The subheadd number can be reset by inserting the +\setsubheaddnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadd. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, the first subheadd is number 1. If you want to start with +number 5, you would enter: + +\setsubheaddnumber{4} +\subheadd{Title of the fifth subheadd} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \setsubheaddnumber parameter is the previous +subheadd number, not the next subheadd number. + The subheadd number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter, +\subheada, \subheadb, \subheadc, or \appendix. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1d7173e845 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| selectspecificfont | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ssfã% + +Parameters: ã|catalog name, font size, leadingã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \selectspecificfont markup permits you to include fonts that are not +members of sets or families, and have an \interlineskip associated with it. +The format of this markup is, + +\selectspecificfont{catalog name}{font size}{leading} + +where catalog name is the system name for that font without the font size +specification. (Complete lists of the catalog names can be found by going +to the TEXT1 help menu, or by looking in the Font Catalogs.) The font +size is the size in points of that face. The leading is the interlineskip + +specification. You cannot use "default" for the leading as you can with +\selectfontset. + To access a specific font made available with \selectspecificfont, you +enter a backslash, followed by the catalog name, followed by the font size, +and ending with a semicolon. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example makes the Computer Modern Slanted font at 12 points available +for use. After specifying, + +\selectspecificfont{cmsl}{12}{14pt} + +you would then enter "\cmsl12;" to use this font. For example, + +\selectspecificfont{cmsl}{12}{14pt} +\twelvept +\cl{\cmsl12; Nuclear Utopia} +Nuclear war is unthinkable. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Nuclear Utopia | +| Nuclear war is unthinkable. | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +Each font specified with \selectspecificfont must be followed by a +semicolon. + You cannot use "default" for the leading as you can with \selectfontset. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bb69c58d75 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| singlespace | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\sspã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Single spacing is the default for TEXT1. The \singlespace markup can +be used to return to single spacing if the spacing has been changed +double spacing with \doublespace. The markup \singlespace markup has no +parameters, and causes an end-of-paragraph, forcing the following text into +a new paragraph. + + ã|Example:ã% +\doublespace +The cultures of industrial nations are based on +unethical accumulations of materials. +This inequality is maintained by power, not +persuasion. +\singlespace +Power politics makes problems that cannot be solved +except by war. +Questions about defining the best nation or the best +religion lead to organized . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The cultures of industrial nations are based on unethical | +| | +| accumulations of materials. This inequality is maintained by power, | +| | +| not persuasion. | +| Power politics makes problems that cannot be solved except by war. | +| Questions about defining the best nation or the best religion lead to | +| organized . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The interline skip value used with \singlespace and \doublespace is set with +the \interlineskip markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..94fe79e895 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| settablenumber | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\stnã% + +Parameters: ã|previous table numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The table number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of +\tabletitle. The table number can be reset by adding the \settablenumber +markup before the next occurrence of \tabletitle. + + ã|Example:ã% +By default, table numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset +in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \settablenumber +to the \titleformat: + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} + + \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl} + \settablenumber{0} + \setsubheadanumber{0} + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + \incontents{yes} } + + ã|Notes:ã% +The number specified in the \settablenumber parameter is the previous table +number, not the next table number. If you want the next \tabletitle to be +Table 90, then specify + +\settablenumber{89} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..582344ae8a --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| strut | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +There are times when it is necessary to have the baselineskip between two +lines be the same, especially if you are building a table that uses rules +between columns. The \strut markup can be used in an \halign to maintain +consistent distance between lines of a table. The \strut markup has no +parameters. Its height is 1.8 times the height of an "x" in the current +point size. Its depth is .6 times the height of an "x" in the current point +size. + + ã|Example:ã% +Consider this table created without the use of \strut, + +\sfs{cm8}{eightpt}{default} + +\twelvept + + +\tabletitle{Comparison of the composition of goat's +milk and that of two common breeds of dairy cows} +{\offinterlineskip\eightpt +\halign{\vrule\hs{3pt}\lft{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule&& + \hs{3pt}\ctr{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule\cr +\noalign{\hrule} +&&\bd Total&&&\cr +\bd Source of milk&\bd Water&\bd Solids& + \bd Fat&\bd Protein&\bd Lactose\cr +\noalign{\hrule height 1pt} +Goats&82.02\%&11.98\%&3.50\%&3.13\%&4.55\%\cr +\noalign{\hrule} +Holstein-Friesian&87.50\%&12.50\%&3.55\%&3.42\%&4.86\%\cr +\noalign{\hrule} +Jersey&85.31\%&14.69\%&5.18\%&3.86\%&4.94\%\cr +\noalign{\hrule} + +}} +\twelvept + +which prints as: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Table 1 | +| Comparison of the composition of goat's milk and that of two common breeds | +| of dairy cows | +| ...................................................... | +| ....................................................... | +| ....................................................... | +| .Jersey...........85.31%..14.69%5.18%..3.86%...4.94%... | +| ...................................................... | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Now add \strut to the \halign preamble, + +\halign{\strut\vrule\hs{3pt}\lft{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule&& + \hs{3pt}\ctr{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule\cr + +and notice the uniform distance between lines: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Table 2 | +| Comparison of the composition of goat's milk and that of two common breeds | +| of dairy cows | +| ...................................................... | +| . . Total . . . . | +| ....................................................... | +| Goats 82.02%11.98% 3.50% 3.13% 4.55% | +| ..Holstein-Friesia87.50%..12.50%3.55%..3.42%...4.86%.. | +| ....................................................... | +| ....................................................... | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The size of the strut changes as the interline skip changes. \twelvept will +have a longer \strut than will \tenpt. + See The TEXbook for more on \offinterlineskip. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e7e95f9a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|SUBHEADAã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\subheadaformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9504d6e77b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|SUBHEADBã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\subheadbformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9d092ec196 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|SUBHEADCã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\subheadcformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..92786990ed --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|SUBHEADDã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\subheadDformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1cd81220f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| symbol | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\syã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \symbol markup sets the face to the Computer Modern Math Symbol face. +Refer to The TEXbook, Appendix F, for a complete list of the characters +available in the Symbol face. + + ã|Example:ã% +This example uses \symbol to print a diagonal arrow: + +Put a {\symbol\char'45} next to . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Put a \ next to . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +For more on the use of the \char markup, refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..81d335148d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|TABLE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\tableformat. This is to be used when you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..292d726559 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|TABLE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\tableformat. This is to be used when you areã|notã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..afa15b556b --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| tableformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\tafã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\titleformat, \incontentsã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \tableformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the +appearance of the table title. + +ã|titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% controls the appearance of the table title. +You may use markup such as \blockquotebegin, \hangingparagraph, \vertical- +space, and \centerline within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup +you may use within or outside of \tableformat: + ã|tablenumber.ã% prints the most recent table number. + ã|tabletitle.ã% prints the most recent table title. + +ã|incontentsã% places the table title in contents (if one is printed). +Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted a table title to print in a hanging paragraph style, and you +didn't want the table title put in the table of contents, enter: + +\tableformat{% + \titleformat{\bqb\hp\bd Table \tablenumber. + \rm\tabletitle\bqe} + \incontents{yes} + } + +\tabletitle{Size data of a Yellow +Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9, +1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)} +\halign{\qquad\ctr{#}&&\hs{1em}\ctr{#}\cr +July 23&July 27&July 31&August 5&August 9\cr +32&67&44&47&18\cr} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| Table 1. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the | +| period of July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) | +| | +| July 23 July 27 July 31 August 5 August 9 | +| 32 67 44 47 18 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \tableformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are +used. If you are using \monospace, the only difference in defaults is that +the table title is printed in the \monospace font instead of \twelvept. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b6d310e084 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|TALARISã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default +proportional space fonts and you are using a Talaris. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d5f13ab97a --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| tabletitle | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\tatã% + +Parameters: ã|title textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +A table is a presentation of information in columns. The \tabletitle markup +centers the title and puts that title in the table of contents. The +\tabletitle markup does not print the actual table, you must use \halign or +\settabs to accomplish that. + + ã|Example:ã% +\tabletitle{Monthly Salaries in Public Libraries\lbr +for 1981} +\tenpt +\halign{\quad\lft{#}&&\quad\ctr{#}\cr +\noalign{\hrule\vs{3pt}} + +&&\ctr{\bd Library Aide}&\ctr{\bd Page}\cr +\omit\ctr{\bd City/Town}&\ctr{\bd Librarian}& + \ctr{\bd and Clerical}&\ctr{\bd and}\cr +\omit\ctr{\bd Libraries}&\ctr{\bd (a)(b)}& + \ctr{\bd Assistant}&\ctr{\bd Bookbinder}\cr +Brewster&190&---&---\cr +Burlington&1158&5.89 hr&3.35/3.50 hr\cr +Castle Rock&300&3.35 hr&---\cr +Cathlamet&225&---&---\cr +Chewelah&290&---&---\cr +Cle Elum&3.50 hr&---&---\cr +Colville&5.68 hr&5.00 hr&---\cr +} + +which prints the table illustrated on the following page. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Table 1 | +| Monthly Salaries in Public Libraries | +| for 1981 | +|.............................................................................| +| Library Aide Page | +| City/Town Librarian and Clerical and | +| Libraries (a)(b) Assistant Bookbinder | +| Brewster 190 --- --- | +| Burlington 1158 5.89 hr 3.35/3.50 hr | +| Castle Rock 300 3.35 hr --- | +| Cathlamet 225 --- --- | +| Chewelah 290 --- --- | +| Cle Elum 3.50 hr --- --- | +| Colville 5.68 hr 5.00 hr --- | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +\tabletitle only prints the table title in the text and places the title +in the table of contents. Use \halign or \settabs to construct the table +itself. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0ee2d7e6b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| tenpt | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +There are two default \selectfontsets established when you format a TEXT1 +file: \twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and +\tenpt for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle. + The font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called +by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation: +\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc), +\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi). + + ã|Example:ã% +Consider this example for switching from 12 point to a 10 point size. + +\tenpt +\centerline{\twelvept\bd Sociogeology} +\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert} +"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Sociogeology | +| by Achilles Chert | +| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +There are some markup, such as \figure, \blockquotebegin, \autoendnote, and +\autofootnote which use \tenpt in formatting. If you decide you want to use +another 10 point font set (like Plantin) instead of Computer Modern as the +default, you must give that set the same name, "tenpt": + +\selectfontset{pl10}{tenpt}{default} +\selectfontset{pl12}{twelvept}{default} +\selectmathset{cg97m}{mathdefault} +\tenpt diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cfb0983202 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| text1 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +You can print the name of the TEXT1 system by entering the markup \text1. + + ã|Example:ã% +\appendix{\text1\ Markup} +Following is the list of markup for \text1. +\twc +\aib +appendix +asisbegin +asisend +\aie +\oc + +will print an appendix that looks like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 2 | +| | +| Appendix A | +| TEXT1 Markup | +| Following is the list of markup for TEXT1. | +| | +| appendix | +| asisbegin | +| asisend | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +You must follow \text1 with a required space (either a tilde ~ or with +a backslash-space, if you want a space following \text1 as indicated in +the example above in the \appendix markup. If you do not need a space +following, such as at the end of the sentence illustrated in the second line +of the example above beginning "Following is . . . ", then omit the space. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dc34bb186e --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| threecolumns | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\thcã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \threecolumns markup formats text in three identical width columns. +Column widths, gutters and margins are calculated automatically. The +default column width is 31% of the galleywidth (hsize). The default gutter +between each column is 3.5% of the galleywidth. + The Flexible format (the default) allows the user to use single column, +two column, and three column text interchangeably on the current page by +entering one of the markup choices at the desired point in the text. The +flexible format will balance the text columns whenever the number of columns +changes. + For example, if the author changes the multiple column format by +typing a different markup TEXT1 will automatically balance the columns it +is currently processing and change to a new number of columns. These +instructions can be inserted at any point on the page. + The author may want to handle tables and other large blocks of text by +returning to a single column for the table by typing \onecolumn immediately +before the table and returning to two or three column formatting immediately +after the table. + All running head, running foot, and inserts are printed across the +full single column width that prints across the top of the current page. +Footnotes will be printed across the full width at the bottom of the page. + + ã|Example:ã% +\threecolumns +\nin Hebrew is called a Semitic language because it has +its roots in Shem, one of the sons of Noah. +Viewing Jerusalem as its center, it is related to the +northern, rougher Aramaic, and to the southern, more +polished Arabic. It has a freshness, simplicity and +power that few modern languages possess. Bounds of the +ancient Semitic tongue were approximately the +Mediterranean Sea on the west, the Euphrates and Tigris +Rivers on the easy, the mountains +of Armenia on the north, +and the coast of Arabia on the south. Consider the first +character, N . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Hebrew is rougher approximately. | +| called Aramaic, the Mediter- | +| a Semitic and to the ranean Sea | +| language southern, on the west, | +| because more pol- the Euphrates. | +| it has its ished Ara- and Tigris | +| roots in bic. It Rivers on | +| Shem, one has a the easy, | +| of the sons freshness, sim- the mountains. | +| of Noah. plicity and of Armenia | +| Viewing power that on the north,. | +| Jerusalem few modern and the coast. | +| as its cen- languages pos Arabia on | +| ter, it is sess. Bounds the south. | +| related to of the an- Consider the | +| the north- cient Semitic first char- | +| ern, tongue were acter, N | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +To change the column width or the gutter width, use the \multicolumnformat +markup. + You cannot specify \threecolumns inside of \vbox, \drawbox, +\paragraphbox, or a floating \figure (non floating figures, \nofloat, +are ok). + If you want footnotes and figures to print in one column instead of +across both columns, use the \fixedformat markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5d43b13234 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|THESISã%model is a thesis model set up to abide by all of the WSU +graduate school's rules. It is a template. You may modify it, but +it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dd15e332b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Theã|TITLEPGã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the +\titlepageformat for changing the way a title page is printed. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dd9d895ec7 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| tableofcontents | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\tocã% + +Parameters: ã|page numberã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \tableofcontents markup prints the table of contents, beginning with +the designated page. A roman numeral page number is specified by entering +a negative page number. This markup must always appear at the end of a +document. + By default, parts, chapters, appendices and subheading levels "A" and +"B" are included in the table of contents. The order of printing in the +table of contents is always + 1. table of contents + 2. list of figures + 3. list of tables + The list of figures will print only if a \figure markup was used. The +list of tables will print only if a \tabletitle markup was used. + + ã|Example:ã% +To print the table of contents beginning on page 32 enter: +of utmost importance. +\tableofcontents{32} + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted the table of contents to begin on roman numeral page three +("iii"), you would enter a minus three. + +New York: Halstead Press. +\tableofcontents{-3} + + ã|Notes:ã% +This markup must always appear at the end of a document. + Multiple line titles may be broken in the table of contents by using +\toclinebreak. + diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f178e50e3c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,478 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| tableofcontentsformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\tocfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã| \toctitle, \prefacetocformat, \parttocformat, +\continuechapter, \chaptertocformat, +\hangingchapterindent, \appendixtocformat, +\hangingappendixindent, \subheadatocformat, +\subheadbtocformat, \subheadctocformat, +\subheaddtocformat, \bibliographytocformat, +\figuretoctitle, \figuretocformat, +\hangingfigureindent, \tabletoctitle, +\tabletocformat, \hangingtableindentã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The table of contents prints with the titles "Table of Contents", "List of +Figures", and "List of Tables" centered in bold letters and each beginning + +on a new page. If you want to change these defaults you use the \table- +ofcontentsformat markup. This markup also changes the way part, chapter, +subhead, appendix, bibliography, preface, figure and table titles print in +table of contents. + +ã|toctitleã% regulates how the table of contents title is to be printed. By +default it is a centered bold title "Table of Contents". Use \toctitle to +change this default. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted the title of the table of contents to print "Contents" you +would enter: + +\tableofcontentsformat{ + \toctitle{\cl{\it Contents}}} + +ã|prefacetocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \preface markup +are to print in the table of contents. By default, they are simply printed +with a \noindent. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted the preface title to print in italics as illustrated on the +next page, you would enter: + +\tocf{\prefacetocformat{\nin\it + \prefacetitle\leader\pn}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|parttocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \part markup are to +print in the table of contents. By default, part titles skip one line, +center the part number, center the part title, skip another line, then print +"Part" followed by the part number again, followed by leader and the page +number: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Part 1 | +| Mechanics | +| | +| Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% + +If you wanted parts to print in a hanging paragraph style, enter: + +\tocf{\parttocformat{\hp\parttitle\leader\pn}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Videodiscs in today's modern office --- Timely | +| TV Tutors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|continuechapterã% if specified as "yes" will print "Chapter" at the top of +each page under the header. The default is "no". + +ã|chaptertocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a chapter title is to be +printed in the table of contents. By default, the chapter number and title +are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered, + +\chapter{The Nineteenth Century and after\lbr +best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers} + +you would get in the table of contents: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | +| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Note that the line break from \lbr only occurs in the text, not in the +table of contents. Use \toclbr to create a line break which is to occur +in the table of contents. To change the amount of indent, use the +\hangingchapterindent. You may use markup such as \newpage, \chaptertitle, +\chapternumber, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \chaptertocformat as +Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingchapternumber, which prints the +chapter number in a similar fashion as \item. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted chapter titles to print in a hanging paragraph style, without +an associated chapter number, you would enter: + +\tocf{\chaptertocformat{\hp\chaptertitle\leader\pn}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | +| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you want the title "Chapter" to appear left justified in the table of +contents above the first chapter number, prior to the first chapter you +would enter the following \putincontents markup: + +\putincontents1{\nin Chapter} +\chapter{First Chapter} +Text of the first chapter . . . + +which prints in the table of contents as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. First Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|hangingchapterindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the +chapter title when you print using \hangingchapternumber. + +ã|appendixtocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how an appendix title is to +be printed in the table of contents. By default, the appendix number and +title are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered, + +\appendix{The Nineteenth Century and after\lbr +best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers} + +you would get in the table of contents: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| A. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | +| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Note that the line break from \lbr only occurs in the text, not in +the table of contents. Use \toclbr to create a line break which +is to occur in the table of contents. To change the amount of +indent, use the \hangingappendixindent. You may use markup such as +\newpage, \appendixtitle, \appendixnumber, \verticalspace, and \center- +line within \appendixtocformat as Nested Markup. You may also use +\hangingappendixnumber, which prints the chapter number in a similar fashion +as \item. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted appendix titles to print in a hanging paragraph style, without +an associated appendix number, you would enter: + +\tocf{\appendixtocformat{\hp\appendixtitle\leader\pn}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | +| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you want the title "Appendix" to appear left justified in the table of +contents above the first appendix number, prior to the first appendix you +would enter the following \putincontents markup: + +\putincontents1{\nin Appendix} +\appendix{First Appendix} +Text of the first appendix . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Appendix | +| A. First Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|hangingappendixindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the +appendix title when you print using \hangingappendixnumber. + +ã|subheadatocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheada to +be block indented 1/2 inch from the left margin. Use \subheadatocformat to +change this default. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 | +| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't quite | +| make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +To have subheada titles indented 1/4inch and printed with a hangingindent, +enter: + +\tocf{\subheadatocformat{\leftindent{.25in} + \hp\subheadatitle \leader \pagenumber}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 | +| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't quite make | +| it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|subheadbtocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadb to +be block indented 1 inch from the left margin. Use \subheadbtocformat to +change the default illustrated here: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 | +| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't | +| quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +To have subheadb titles indented /4 inch and printed with a hangingindent +prefaced with "cc.aa.bb" where cc is the chapter number, aa is the subheada +number and bb is the subheadb number, enter: + + \tocf{\subheadbtocformat{\leftindent{.25in} + \hp\chapternumber.\subheadanumber.\subheadbnumber + \quad\subheadbtitle \leader \pagenumber}} + + The first \subheadb in the second \subheada of the first chapter would +print in the table of contents as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 | +| 1.2.1 Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They | +| don't quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|subheadctocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadc to +be block indented 11/2inch from the left margin. Use \subheadctocformat to +change this default. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. Document Exchange .. . ...... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. .. .. . .....15 | +| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They | +| don't quite make it yet .... . . ..... . . ..... . . ....15 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +To have subheadc titles indented 3/4inch and printed in italics, enter: + +\tocf{\subheadctocformat{\leftindent{.75in} + \nin\italic + \subheadctitle \leader \pagenumber}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 | +| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't | +| quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|subheaddtocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadd to +be block indented 2 inches from the left margin. Use \subheaddtocformat to +change this default. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 | +| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: | +| They don't quite make | +| it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +To have subheadd titles indented 2 inches, printed with a hangingindent in a +10 point Computer Modern italic font, and no page number, enter: + +\tocf{\subheadatocformat{\leftindent{2in} + \hp\tenpt\italic + \subheaddtitle}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Chapter | +| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 | +| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: | +| They don't quite make it yet | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|bibliographytocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \bibliography +markup are to print in the table of contents. By default, they are simply +printed with a \noindent like prefaces. Use \bibliographytocformat to +change this default. + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted the preface title to print in bold, you would enter: + +\tocf{\bibliographytocformat{\nin\bold + \bibtitle\leader\pn}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ã|Bibliographyã%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|figuretoctitleã% determines how the list of figures is to print. By +default, it will start a new page, center the title "List of Figures", and +then print a header above the first figure, which in the example below had +the title "Hot times . . . " and printed on page 43: ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 21 | +| List of Figures | +| Figure Page | +| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 43 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted the list of figures to print the title "Illustrations" instead +of "List of Figures" after skipping to a new page, enter + +\tocf{\figuretoctitle{\newpage + \cl{\bd Illustrations} + \line{Figure\rt{Page}}}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Illustrations | +| Figure Page | +| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun ... . ... ... . .....43 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|figuretocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a figure title is to be +printed in the table of contents. By default, the figure number and title +are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered: + +\figure{\halfpage}{The Nineteenth Century +and after best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers} +the figure title would print in the contents as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | +| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + To change the amount of indent, use the \hangingfigureindent. You may +use markup such as \figuretitle and \figurenumber, within \figuretocformat +as Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingnumber{\figurenumber} which +prints the figure number in a similar fashion as \item. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted figure titles to print in a hanging paragraph style prefaced +with the figure number, you would enter: + +\tocf{\figuretocformat{\hp + \figurenumber\quad\figuretitle\leader\pn}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1 The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | +| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|hangingfigureindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the +figure title when you print using: + +\hangingnumber{\figurenumber} + +ã|tabletoctitleã% determines how the list of tables is to print. By +default, it will start a new page, center the title "List of Tables ", and +then print a header above the first table, which in the example below had +the title "Hot times . . . " and printed on page 55: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| List of Tables | +| Table Page | +| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 55 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted the list of tables to print the title "Tables" after skipping +to a new page, enter + +\tocf{\tabletoctitle{\newpage + \cl{\bd Tables} + \line{Table\rt{Page}}}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Tables | +| Table Page | +| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 55 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|tabletocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a table title is to be +printed in the table of contents. By default, the table number and title +are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered: + +\tabletitle{The Nineteenth Century +and after best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers} +the table title would print as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | +| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + To change the amount of indent, use the \hangingtableindent. You may +use markup such as \tabletitle and \tablenumber, within \tabletocformat as +Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingnumber{\tablenumber}, which prints +the table number in a similar fashion as \item. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you wanted table titles to print in a hanging paragraph style prefaced +with "cc.tt" where cc is the chapter number and tt is the table number, you +would enter, + +\tocf{\tabletocformat{\hp\chapternumber.\tablenumber + \quad\tabletitle\leader\pn}} + +and the first table of the second chapter would print in the contents as: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 2.1 The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | +| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +ã|hangingtableindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the +table title when you print using: + +\hangingnumber{\tablenumber} + + ã|Notes:ã% +The \tableofcontentsformat markup should always appear at the top of a +document, but after \monospace, if both are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b7503bd102 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| toclinebreak | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\toclbrã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \toclinebreak markup causes a line to finish without interrupting a +paragraph in the table of contents. Occasionally it is necessary to break +a line in a precise place within a paragraph, as opposed to letting TEXT1 +decide where to break the line. This markup does not end a paragraph, it +simply starts the following text of the paragraph on a new line in the table +of contents instead of concatenating it to the end of the previous line. + + ã|Example:ã% +\chapter{More facts about Datapoint +information\toclbr processing\linebreak + and office +automation products,\lbr\toclbr +systems, and software} + +will print the chapter title on three lines in the text of the document: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| More facts about Datapoint information processing | +| and office automation products, | +| systems, and software | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +and on three lines in the table of contents: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| 1. More facts about Datapoint information | +| processing and office automation products, | +| systems, and software . . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . ...... . . 32 | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3d9a1bd87c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| today | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \today markup prints the current date in a standard format, "month day, +year". + + ã|Example:ã% +\rightlinesbegin +John R. Bays +Philosophy 484 +\today +\rightlinesend + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| John R. Bays | +| Philosophy 484 | +| January 15, 1987 | +| | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a839ce01d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \topline1-5 COMMANDS | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \topline1-5 commands set what will appear at the top of each page after the +title page. The \topline1-5 command is always used in conjunction with the +\bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) command. This command +has the format: + + \evenpages{ + \toplineX{llll}{cccc}{rrrr} + } + +where "X" may be 1-5 and refers to the toptitle line number; "llll" is the +information to be printed left justified; "cccc" is the information to be +printed centered; and "rrrr" is the information to be printed right justified. +For example: + + \evenpages{ + \topline1{Joe Smith}{June 3, 1984}{\pagenumber} + \topline2{\rule}{}{} + } + +will space down the amount specified on the \topmargin command and put "Joe +Smith" at the top far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the current page +number on the top far right of the first line of each even page. On the second +line of each even page will be a horizontal line across the width of the text. +The running toptitle of page 4 would look like this: + +Joe Smith June 3, 1984 4 +_______________________________________________________________________________ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..592dd44217 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \topline1-5 COMMANDS | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \topline1-5 commands set what will appear at the top of each page after the +title page. The \topline1-5 command is always used in conjunction with the +\bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) command. This command +has the format: + + \oddpages{ + \toplineX{llll}{cccc}{rrrr} + } + +where "X" may be 1-5 and refers to the toptitle line number; "llll" is the +information to be printed left justified; "cccc" is the information to be +printed centered; and "rrrr" is the information to be printed right justified. +For example: + + \oddpages{ + \topline1{Joe Smith}{June 3, 1984}{\pagenumber} + \topline2{\rule}{}{} + } + +will space down the amount specified on the \topmargin command and put "Joe +Smith" at the top far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the current page +number on the top far right of the first line of each odd page. On the second +line of each odd page will be a horizontal line across the width of the text. +The running toptitle of page 5 would look like this: + +Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5 +_______________________________________________________________________________ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..407c650c62 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \topmargin (\tma) COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \topmargin (\tma) command will set the distance from the top of the page to +the top of the running top title text. This command has the format: + + \topmargin{uu} + +where "uu" is the unit of measurement in number of lines or in any valid TeX +measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The default top margin is one inch, or +\topmargin{1IN}. This command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX input +file before any actual text is entered. + +In order to change the top margin from the default of one inch to one-half +inch, you would enter: + + \tma{.5in} + +Which would give you one-half inch between the top of the page to the top of +the running top title. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b0e3f5dc3d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| titlepage | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\tpã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By convention, a title page is a display page, differing from body pages. +It usually has sinkage (extra vertical space before the title), a centered +title (in bold or larger type), and a blind folio (where the page is +numbered but the number is not printed). It may also have special text in +the footing. + By default, the first page of any paper is a title page in TEXT1, +although it can be suppressed by \notitlepage. Furthermore, title pages can +be added anywhere in a paper using \titlepage. Since the title page usually +receives different treatment from body pages, there is separate markup for +it. By default, the title page adds 1 inch to the top margin and does not +print a running foot line at the bottom of the page. + The next page after a title page in TEXT1 is always assumed to be a +\notitlepage. + + ã|Example:ã% +Some applications have more than one page in the document which are not +to carry a running top title. For example, if you want a chapter to +always print without a running top title, you could add \titlepage to the +\chapterformat markup: + +\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} + \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject + \titlepage + \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} + \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} + \vs{1\bl} + \setsubheadanumber{0} + \setsubheadbnumber{0} + \setsubheadcnumber{0} + \setsubheaddnumber{0}} + + \incontents{yes}} + + ã|Notes:ã% +Use the \titlepageformat to change the defaults on the title page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..61299a89b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| titlepageformat | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +\titlepageformat{\titleleadskip{1in} + \titlefootline{} + } + +Abbreviation: ã|\tpfã% + +Parameters: ã|submarkupã% + +Submarkup: ã|\titleleadskip, \titlefootlineã% + + ã|Description:ã% +By convention, a title page is a display page, differing from body pages. +It usually has sinkage (extra vertical space before the title), a centered +title (in bold or larger type), and a blind folio (where the page is +numbered but the number is not printed). It may also have special text in +the footing. The \titlepageformat markup changes the heading and footing of +a titlepage. + +ã|titleleadskipã% is the amount of space to be left at the top of title +pages, in addition to the top margin. By default, there is a 1 inch lead +skip and a 1 inch top margin, making for a 2 inch white space at the top of +each title page. + +ã|titlefootlineã% is the footing at the bottom of a title page. Similar +in function to the running foot, its difference is that you do not specify +\bothpage, \evenpage, or \oddpage with \titlefootline. + + ã|Example:ã% +If you want to add 3 inches to the top margin, and print "Bays" at the +bottom of the page with the page number, enter: + +\titlepageformat{\titleleadskip{3in} + \titlefootline{\line{\lft{Bays}\rt{\pn}}} + } + +which prints a footing at the bottom of the page like: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +| | +| Bays 3 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..25af085df6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| typewriter | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\ttã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Typewriter is a medium-weight uniformly spaced type face. You get this face +when you enter \typewriter. Each character has the same width. It is handy +in \asisbegin blocks. + + ã|Example:ã% +Using the typewriter font, + +\asisbegin +And yet not cloy thy lips 1 + with loath'd satiety, 2 +But rather famish them 3 + + amid their plenty, 4 +\asisend + +you get the line number on the right to line up: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +| | +| And yet not cloy thy lips 1 | +| with loath'd satiety, 2 | +| But rather famish them 3 | +| amid their plenty, 4 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Without \typewriter you get: + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| And yet not cloy thy lips 1 | +| with loath'd satiety, 2 | +| But rather famish them 3 | +| amid their plenty, 4 | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + + ã|Notes:ã% +none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eac46c836c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| twocolumns | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\twcã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \twocolumns markup formats text in two columns with identical width. +The column widths and gutter are calculated automatically within the +specified margins. The default width of both columns is 48% of the +galleywidth. The default gutter width is 4% of the galleywidth. + The Flexible format allows the user to use single column, two column, +and three column text interchangeably on the current page by entering one of +the markup choices at the desired point in the text. The flexible format +will balance the text columns whenever the number of columns changes. + For example, if the author changes the multiple column format by +typing a different markup TEXT1 will automatically balance the columns it +is currently processing and change to a new number of columns. These +instructions can be inserted at any point on the page. + The author may want to handle tables and other large blocks of text by +returning to a single column for the table by typing \onecolumn immediately +before the table and returning to two or three column formatting immediately +after the table. + All running head, running foot, and inserts are printed across the +full single column width that prints across the top of the current page. +Footnotes will be printed across the full width at the bottom of the page. + + ã|Example:ã% +\twocolumns +\nin Hebrew is called a Semitic language because it has +its roots in Shem, one of the sons of Noah. +Viewing Jerusalem as its center, it is related to the +northern, rougher Aramaic, and to the southern, more +polished Arabic. It has a freshness, simplicity and +power that few modern languages possess. Bounds of the +ancient Semitic tongue were approximately the +Mediterranean Sea on the west, the Euphrates and Tigris +Rivers on the easy, +the mountains of Armenia on the north, +and the coast of Arabia on the south. Consider the first +character, N . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Hebrew is called languages pos- | +| a Semitic lan- sess. Bounds | +| guage because it of the ancient | +| has its roots Semitic tongue | +| in Shem, one were approxi- | +| of the sons of mately the Medi- | +| Noah. View- terranean Sea on | +| ing Jerusalem as the west, the | +| its center, it Euphrates and | +| is related to Tigris Rivers on | +| the northern, the easy, the | +| rougher Aramaic, mountains of Ar- | +| and to the menia on the | +| southern, more north, and the | +| polished Arabic. coast of Ara- | +| It has a fresh- bia on the | +| ness, simplic- south. Consider | +| ity and power the first char- | +| that few modern acter, N . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +To change the column width or the gutter width, use the \multicolumnformat +markup. + You cannot specify \twocolumns inside of \vbox, \drawbox, \paragraphbox, +or a floating \figure (non floating figures, \nofloat, are ok). + If you want footnotes and figures to print in one column instead of +across both columns, use the \fixedformat markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3a4cfcfd53 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| twelvept | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|noneã% + + ã|Description:ã% +There are two default \selectfontsets established when you format a TEXT1 +file: \twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and +\tenpt for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle. + The font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called +by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation: +\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc), +\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi). + + ã|Example:ã% +Consider this example for switching from 12 point to a 10 point size. + +\tenpt +\centerline{\twelvept\bd Sociogeology} +\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert} +"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Sociogeology | +| by Achilles Chert | +| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +There are some markup, such as \tableformat, \runningheadformat, \run- +ningfootformat, \chapterformat, \partformat and the other heading markup. +If you want to use another 12 point font set (like Plantin) as the +default instead of Computer Modern, you must give that set the same name, +"twelvept": + +\selectfontset{pl10}{tenpt}{default} +\selectfontset{pl12}{twelvept}{default} +\selectmathset{cg97m}{mathdefault} +\twelvept diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..29e63f08f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| underscore | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\usã% + +Parameters: ã|textã% + + ã|Description:ã% +Underscoring, drawing a line under words or sentences, is also used for +emphasis and to indicate book titles. + + ã|Example:ã% + +Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous +book, \us{The} \us{Intact} \us{Societies:} +\us{Vestals} \us{and} \us{Volcanos} +\us{in} \us{the} \us{South Pacific}, which suggests . . . +ff ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous book, The Intact | +| Societies: Vestals and Volcanos in the South Pacific, which suggests | +| . . . | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +In proportional spacing, the \underscore markup has the occasional +disadvantage of preventing hyphenation and line breaking, which can result +in awkward or impossible interword spacing and line breaks. To remedy this, +put each word to be underscored inside of its own \underscore markup as +illustrated above. + Do not use \underscore in math mode; use \underline instead. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..981ddf97ae --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| vbox | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|box materialã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \vbox markup has many uses. One use is to be able to put multiple lines +into a \drawbox markup. + + ã|Example:ã% +\drawbox{\vbox{The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena +is the research arm of Giga Geologicals, +Inc. No apologies +are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments. +The opinions of the authors do not reflect +company policy.}} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| ........................................................................... | +| . The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Gig . | +| . Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of . | +| . experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. . | +| ........................................................................... | +| | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+. + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..872fadaa4f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \verticalspace (\vs) COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \verticalspace (\vs) command will leave the specified amount of space or +the specified number of blank lines in the text. This command will also force +the following text into a new paragraph. The format for the \verticalspace +(\vs) command is: + + \verticalspace{x} + +Where "x" is the number of blank lines or space you wish to leave. For +example, + + \verticalspace{4\bl} + +will leave four blank lines, and + + \verticalspace{2in} + +will leave two inches of blank space. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..60e469f102 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| vrule | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|noneã% + +Parameters: ã|dimensionã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \vrule markup draws a vertical rule. It is a native TEX markup, and +the usage is different in that the parameter is not surrounded with curly +braces. If you do not supply a dimension, TEXT1 will print the rule with +a height of the highest character in that line and the depth of the deepest +character in that line. By default, the rule drawn has a thickness (width) +of .4pt. + + ã|Notes:ã% +Refer to The TEXbook for more on \vrule and how to use the "depth" parameter +with the "height" and "width" parameters. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fb1a1cc8f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| verticalspace | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\vsã% + +Parameters: ã|units of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \verticalspace markup creates blank lines (or space) on a page. This +markup causes a break in text and leaves a specified amount of space within +a page. Any following text starts a new paragraph. The total amount of +white space left is the units of measure (dimension) in the \verticalspace, +plus the current paragraph skip value. This markup is followed by a +parameter, which can be entered in whole blank lines, inches, points, or +other valid units of measure. + + ã|Example:ã% +\verticalspace{24pt} + +{\bd Minerals and Human Behavior} +\verticalspace{1\bl} +"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert +Camus, a novelist who lionized the labors of . . . + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| | +| | +| Minerals and Human Behavior | +| | +| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, a novelist who | +| lionized the labors of . . . | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% +You can tell TEXT1 you want a variable amount of white space between lines +by entering something line: + +\verticalspace{10pt plus 2pt minus 1pt} + +which tells TEXT1 you want 10 points of white space in addition to the +paragraph skip. If TEXT1 cannot balance text to the bottom of the page +when \normalbottom is in effect (which is the default), then the above +specification allows TEXT1 to add up to 2 points of white space or subtract +up to 1 point of white space from the 10 points of white space. + If you enter a \verticalspace markup at the top of a page it will be +ignored. Putting a \verticalspace at the bottom of a page is risky, also, +if the amount of space left on the page is less than the amount asked for. +The difference will not be carried over to the following page; it will be +lost. Both difficulties can be resolved by using a required space markup, +\verticalspacekeep. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..12befa9880 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| verticalspacekeep | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +Abbreviation: ã|\vskã% + +Parameters: ã|units of measureã% + + ã|Description:ã% +The \verticalspacekeep markup leaves a required amount of space, for a +figure, plate, or table. The space will always be kept together on +the current page or printed at the top of the next page if not enough +space remains on the current page. Text that follows a \verticalspacekeep +will not be used to fill in the current page if the required space is +moved to the following page. The amount of white space left is the +\verticalspacekeep dimension plus the current paragraph skip value. + + ã|Example:ã% +\verticalspacekeep{2in} + +{\bd Sociogeology} +{\it Minerals and Human Behavior} + ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| | +| Sociogeology Minerals and Human Behavior | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + + ã|Notes:ã% + +\verticalspacekeep is the best way to have white space left at the top of a +page. \verticalspace will not leave white space at the top of a page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ec89a93efc --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| TEXT1 \width COMMAND | ++-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ + +The \width command specifies the width of the page that will be used for +printing the file. The format is: + + \width{uu} + +where "uu" is the unit of measurement in any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, +etc.) or number of 10-pitch characters. The default page width is 8.5 inches, +or \width{8.5IN}. This command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX +input file before any actual text is entered. |